2017 Chrysler Pacifica Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2017-pacifica

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 828 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Pacifica
OWNER’S MANUAL

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................7
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . ............................................13
4GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .....................................211
5SAFETY ....................................................................265
6STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................379
7INCASEOFEMERGENCY .......................................................527
8MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE ....................................611
9TECHNICAL DATA ............................................................673
10 MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................691
11 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .......................................................797
12 INDEX .....................................................................805
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵INTRODUCTION ........................4
䡵HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............4
▫Essential Information ....................4
▫Symbols..............................4
䡵WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............6
䡵VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....6
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
6 INTRODUCTION
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTENTS
䡵FRONT VIEW ...........................8
䡵REAR VIEW ............................9
䡵INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................10
䡵INTERIOR .............................11
2
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment
2 — Windshield
3 — Exterior Mirrors
4 — Doors
5 — Wheels/Tires
6 — Headlights
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1—AirVents
2 — Multifunction Lever
3 — Instrument Cluster
4 — Windshield Wiper Lever
5 — Glove/Storage Compartment
6 — Ignition
7 — Steering Wheel
8 — Headlight Switch
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Power Window/Door Lock Switches
2 — Electronic Gear Selector
3 — Uconnect Radio
4 — Switch Panel
5 — Door handle
6 — Climate Control
7 — Center Console
8 — Seats
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵KEYS ................................19
▫RKEKeyFob.........................19
䡵IGNITION SWITCH ......................30
䡵REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED ............................33
▫Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped . . .33
▫How To Use Remote Start ................34
▫To Enter Remote Start Mode...............35
▫To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle .............................35
▫To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ..............................35
▫Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped ...........................36
▫Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped ................36
▫General Information ....................36
䡵SENTRY KEY...........................37
䡵VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . .38
▫Rearming Of The System .................38
▫To Arm The System ....................38
3
▫To Disarm The System ..................39
䡵DOORS ..............................40
▫Manual Lock .........................40
▫Central Lock/Unlock — If Equipped.........43
▫Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped ...........................44
▫Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry ........44
▫Manual Sliding Side Door ................49
▫Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped ......50
▫Hands-Free Sliding Doors – If Equipped ......54
▫Safe Lock Device — If Equipped............55
▫Child Locks ..........................56
䡵SEATS ...............................58
▫Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) ...........59
▫Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...........63
▫Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped ...........................84
▫Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped .87
▫Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped .........90
▫Heated Seats — If Equipped...............94
▫Ventilated Seats — If Equipped.............97
▫Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks .........98
䡵HEAD RESTRAINTS .....................98
▫Head Restraints — Front Seats .............99
▫Head Restraints — Second Row ...........100
▫Head Restraints — Third Row ............100
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints — If
Equipped ...........................101
䡵STEERING WHEEL .....................101
▫Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .........101
▫Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ......102
䡵MIRRORS ............................104
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .104
▫Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .105
▫Outside Mirrors ......................106
▫Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped ...........................106
▫Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ..........106
▫Power Mirrors — If Equipped ............106
▫Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........107
▫Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped ...............107
▫Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped.......108
▫Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .109
▫Conversation Mirror....................110
䡵EXTERIOR LIGHTS .....................110
▫Headlight Switch .....................110
▫Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......111
▫Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . .112
▫Headlight Delay — If Equipped ...........112
▫Lights-On Reminder ...................112
▫Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....113
▫Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ...........113
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
▫Multifunction Lever ...................113
▫Turn Signals .........................114
▫Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ........115
▫High/Low Beam Switch ................115
▫Flash-To-Pass ........................115
▫Automatic High Beam — If Equipped .......115
▫Battery Protection .....................116
䡵INTERIOR LIGHTS .....................117
▫Courtesy/Interior Lighting ..............117
▫Instrument Panel Dimmer Control .........118
䡵WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS ......120
▫Intermittent Wiper System ...............121
▫Windshield Wiper Operation .............121
▫Windshield Washers....................121
▫Mist Feature .........................122
▫Rear Wiper And Washer.................122
▫Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........122
䡵CLIMATE CONTROLS ..................124
▫Manual Climate Controls – 3 Zone — If
Equipped ...........................124
▫Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) – 3 Zone
— If Equipped .......................132
▫Operating Tips .......................146
䡵WINDOWS ...........................149
▫Power Windows ......................149
䡵TRI-PANE VISTA VIEW SUNROOF — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................153
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫Opening Sunroof ......................154
▫Closing Sunroof.......................155
▫Wind Buffeting .......................155
▫Power Sun Shade — If Equipped ..........156
▫Pinch Protect Feature ...................157
▫Sunroof Maintenance ...................157
▫Ignition OFF Operation .................157
䡵HOOD ..............................158
▫Opening ............................158
▫Closing.............................159
䡵LIFTGATE ...........................160
▫Opening ...........................160
▫Closing ............................162
▫Power Liftgate — If Equipped ............163
▫Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped .........165
▫Cargo Area Features....................168
䡵GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED. . . .175
▫Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .176
▫Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......180
▫Using HomeLink .....................182
▫Security ............................182
▫Troubleshooting Tips ...................182
▫General Information....................183
䡵INTERNAL EQUIPMENT .................184
▫Storage .............................184
▫Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .192
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
▫Sun Screens — If Equipped ..............193
▫Power Outlets .......................194
▫Power Inverter — If Equipped ............197
▫Cigar Lighter — If Equipped .............199
▫Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped .......199
▫Overhead Storage With Sunglass Storage . . . .200
䡵ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .201
▫Deploying The Crossbars ................202
▫Stowing The Crossbars..................205
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (RKE Key Fob)
with a built in emergency key and a keyless push button
Ignition system.
RKE Key Fob
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held RKE Key Fob. The RKE key fob does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key
Fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking/
unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the
emergency key with you when valet parking.
Three Button RKE Key Fob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Four Button RKE Key Fob Five Button RKE Key Fob
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Six Button RKE Key Fob Seven Button RKE Key Fob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
To Unlock The Doors
NOTE: Uconnect Settings lets you program the system
to unlock either the driver’s side doors on the first push
(default) or unlock all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob. To change the
default setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key
Fob once to unlock the front and rear driver doors or
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors liftgate. The
hazard lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
The illuminated entry system will be activated.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2nd Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key
Fob twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and
liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be
activated.
First Push Unlock
Second Push Unlock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Emergency Key Feature
The RKE Key Fob also contains and an emergency key,
which stores in the bottom of the RKE Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key Fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking
the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
Mechanical Latch To Release Emergency Key
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, press the mechanical
button on the side of the RKE Key Fob with your thumb
and pull the emergency key out with your other hand
while pushing the mechanical button.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob
to lock all doors and liftgate. The hazard lights will flash
once and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the
signal. Settings in radio can change to lights only, chirp
only, or both.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated Vehicle
Key
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. This is signaled by a quick flash of the
turn signals.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again only if the
key is inside the passenger compartment.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
•Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
•Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the mechani-
cal release button on the side of the RKE Key Fob with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand. 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE Key Fob apart. Make sure not to damage
the plastic mechanical attachment points.
Emergency Key Removal
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE Key Fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming Additional Transmitters
If you do not have a programmed RKE Key Fob, contact
your authorized dealer for details.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE: Only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a RKE Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle,
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Separating The RKE Key Fob Case
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
CAUTION!
•Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
•For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE Key
Fobs. Duplication of RKE Key Fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of pro-
gramming a blank RKE Key Fob to the vehicle electron-
ics. A blank RKE Key Fob is one that has never been
programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
KeySense Features — If Equipped
This feature provides the vehicle owner with the ability
to identify a specific vehicle key for which a customized
category of vehicle settings can be applied to determine
the driving experience for other drivers of the vehicle.
The vehicle settings are protected by a unique 4-digit
PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the
specific settings for the first time.
This feature also has additional features that are always
enabled when the specific key is in use that cannot be set
by the vehicle owner. While this specific RKE Key Fob is
in use, the vehicle will respond accordingly to the cus-
tomized vehicle settings and mandatory features. This
includes enhanced driving assistance features, increased
driver alerts, and the locking of certain optional features.
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KeySense Unique Splash Screen
At start-up the KeySense splash screen should inform the
driver that the vehicle will be functioning in KeySense
mode when the KeySense key is in use.
Start Up Display Features
•Unique splash screen graphic
•Telltale
illuminated
•After unique splash screen, and after stored messages
are cycled, then start-up KeySense messages (Range &
Max Speed) are displayed.
The following features are always enabled when this key
is in use:
•Entertainment Audio Muted if 1st row occupied Seat
Belts are not Fastened
•Consistent Seat Belt Unfastened Chime
•Maximum Radio Volume limited to 15 out of 39
•Daytime Running Lights
For additional information please refer to “Uconnect
Settings” located in “Multimedia.”
KeySense RKE Key Fob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
IGNITION SWITCH
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the RKE Key
Fob is in the passenger compartment, and the drivers foot
on the brake pedal.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
The ignition can be placed in the following positions:
OFF
•The engine is stopped.
•Some electrical devices are available.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ACC
•The engine is stopped.
•Some electrical devices are still available.
ON/RUN
•Driving position.
•All the electrical devices are available.
START
•Start the engine.
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the RKE Key Fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side
opposite of the emergency key) of the RKE Key Fob
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
NOTE: The vehicle will not start if the RKE Key Fob is
located inside the cargo area AND the liftgate is opened.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove the
Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: For further information, refer to ⬙Starting Proce-
dures⬙in ⬙Starting And Operating.⬙
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the RKE Key Fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of 328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate
Control, vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above
80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats, and
optional heated steering wheel in temperatures below
40° F (4.4° C).
NOTE:
•The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE Key Fob
may reduce this range.
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
•Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
•Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
•Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
•Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
•Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
•Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
•Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•Gear Selector in PARK
•Doors closed
•Hood closed
•Liftgate closed
•Hazard switch off
•Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
•Battery at an acceptable charge level
•RKE PANIC button not pushed
•System not disabled from previous remote start event
•Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
•Ignition in STOP/OFF position
•Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
•Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
•Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE Key Fob twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals
will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob to unlock the
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry via the door handles, and disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the
end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the START/
STOP button.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote
Start Active — Push Start Button” will display in the 3.5”
EVIC or 7” DID until you push the START button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the Climate Control,
vented seats (if equipped) are also activated in tempera-
tures above 80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats,
and optional heated steering wheel in temperatures
below 40° F (4.4° C).. These features will stay on through
the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition switch
is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be acti-
vated and deactivated through the Uconnect Settings. For
more information on Remote Start Comfort System op-
eration, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting Remote Start will
resume previous operation, except if the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer
timer and operation will continue.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (RKE Key Fob) to pre-
vent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only
RKE Key Fob that are programmed to the vehicle can be
used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will
shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob
is used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
RKE Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these condi-
tions will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the RKE Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm
provides both audible and visible signals. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro-
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙for further information).
•For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system
is OFF.
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
•Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
•Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid RKE Key Fob available in
the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry⬙in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙
for further information).
•Push the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
•Push the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
•Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙for further
information).
•Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
•For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition START/
STOP button (requires at least one valid RKE Key
Fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
•The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE Key Fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
•The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
•When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
DOORS
Manual Lock
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear
doors, rotate the door lock button until the ribbing is
visible.
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Door Lock location
1 — Manual Door Lock
2 — Door Handle
Manual Door Lock Rocker Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
If the door lock button is locked (no ribbing is visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
NOTE:
•For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
•When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the key-
less ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Manual Rear Door Lock location
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Central Lock/Unlock — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
1 — Unlock Power Switch
2 — Lock Power Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound
if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and a
door is open, as a reminder to remove the RKE Key Fob.
If you push the power door lock switch while the sliding
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
will occur only after the gear selector has been placed
into the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven
(the gear selector has been placed out of PARK and all
doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the power
door locks (lock or unlock).
For further information, refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia”.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF, dis-
abling passive entry will also disable the hands free
sliding doors and liftgate closures. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
•If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
•If the child safety locks have been engaged the sliding
side doors can be unlocked from the outside using the
hands free RKE or Passive Entry system.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid RKE key fob within 3ft (1 m) of the drivers
door handle, grab the drivers front door handle to unlock
the drivers side doors (driver/sliding door) automati-
cally. The interior door panel rocker knob will rotate
when the door is unlocked. NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors and liftgate will unlock when you grab hold of
the driver’s front door handle. To select between “Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid RKE key fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automati-
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of RKE key fob In
Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
RKE key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock
feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
•A lock request is made by a valid RKE key fob while a
door is open.
•A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
•A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
finds a RKE key fob inside the car, and it does not find
any RKE key fob outside the car, then the car will unlock
and alert the customer.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid RKE key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no
valid RKE key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are met:
•The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
•There is a valid RKE key fob outside the vehicle and
within 3 ft (1 m) of either Passive Entry door handle.
•Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
NOTE: On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and
the RKE key fob can be locked in the vehicle.
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid RKE key fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate,
cycle the handle to open the liftgate and pull the liftgate
open with one fluid motion.
NOTE: If “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” is pro-
grammed, only the liftgate will unlock when the liftgate
release handle is pushed. If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”
is programmed, all doors and the liftgate will unlock
when the liftgate release handle is pushed. To select
between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s RKE key fobs within 3 ft (1 m)
of the driver or passenger front door handle, push the
door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and the
liftgate.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
•The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button, or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Manual Sliding Side Door
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back-
wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
hold open latch in order to close the door.
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol-
lowing guidelines:
•Always open the door smoothly.
•Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open-
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
the downhill direction.
•There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
exterior handle.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened while
the fuel door is open.
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The power sliding door may be power opened or closed
in several ways:
•RKE key fob
•inside or outside handles
•the following buttons located
•in the overhead console
•just inside the sliding door
•on the outside handle
•Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped
Using any of the above ways:
•when the door is fully closed, the door will open.
•when the door is fully open, the door will close.
•when the door is moving, the door will reverse.
Push the button on the RKE key fob twice within five
seconds to open, close, or reverse a power sliding door.
The RKE Key Fob and the overhead console button will
operate the door when the door is locked. All other ways
require the sliding door to be unlocked. If the vehicle is
equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the button on the
outside handle or Hands-Free feature (if equipped) will
unlock and open the sliding door, with a valid Passive
Entry RKE Key Fob within 3ft (1m) of the door handle.
NOTE: Opening or closing the hands free sliding door (if
equipped) requires a valid RKE key fob within 3 ft (1 m)
of the door handle. If Passive Entry is turned off in the
Uconnect Settings this feature will not be functional.
To operate the sliding door manually with the handles or
to avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
power Off button, located in the overhead console, to
remove power to the handles and buttons just inside the
sliding doors. The power OFF LED, in the overhead
console, will be lit when the handles are manual. When
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
the LED is lit, pushing the power sliding door power OFF
button will return the handles to power operation.
NOTE: Tones are sounded and the turn signals are
flashed with sliding door movements. These alerts can be
turned on or off in ‘Uconnect Settings’.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
B-Pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers.
Driver Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
door will reverse direction.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
power Off button, located in the overhead console, to
remove power to the handles and buttons just inside the
sliding doors.
NOTE:
•The sliding door will not power open or close if the
gear selector is not in Park or Neutral.
•If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-
cally stop. If this occurs, the power sliding door must
be opened or closed manually.
Passenger Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught
in the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door
path is clear before closing the door.
WARNING!
Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a
sliding door or door open message or warning indi-
cator. Failure to do this could result in unintention-
ally leaving the sliding door open while driving.
Hands-Free Sliding Doors – If Equipped
Hands-Free Feature
To open or close the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a
gentle single forward and back kicking motion under the
Hands-Free Sliding Doors
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle in the general location below the door handle(s).
Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion
or the sensors may not detect the motion.
NOTE: To open or close the Hands-Free Sliding Doors
requires a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft
(1 m) of the door handle. If a valid Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob is not within 3 ft (1 m), the door will not respond
to any kicks.
NOTE: The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be
turned off through Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. The
Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature should be turned off
during Jacking, Tire Changing, and Service.
NOTE:
•The sliding doors will not power open or close if the
gear selector is in gear or the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
•If anything obstructs the power sliding doors while it
is closing or opening, the sliding doors will automati-
cally reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•If the power sliding doors encounters multiple ob-
structions within the same cycle, the system will
automatically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be
opened or closed manually.
Safe Lock Device — If Equipped
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
may be overridden by pushing the OFF side of the Power
Switch located in the front overhead console.
When the power sliding door power switch is in the OFF
position, the power sliding side door may not be opened
or closed by pushing the switch located on the B-Pillar
trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or activating
the inside power sliding door handle.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Safety Locks have been engaged
the sliding side doors can be unlocked from the outside
using the hands free RKE or Passive Entry system.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child
Protection Door Lock control inward (toward the
vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock.
Overhead Console Buttons
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Power Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
•After engaging (or disengaging) the Child Protection
Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protec-
tion Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside
door handle will not open the sliding door when the
Child Protection Door Lock is engaged.
•The power sliding door will operate from the switch
located just inside the sliding door, regardless of the
Child Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid
unintentional operation of the power sliding door
from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
power Off button, located in the overhead console, to
remove power to the handles and buttons just inside
the sliding doors. The power Off LED, in the over-
head console, will be lit when the handles are
manual and the buttons just inside the sliding doors
are disabled. When the overhead console power OFF
Child Protection Door Locks
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
LED is lit, the sliding door may not be power opened
or closed by pushing the buttons just inside the sliding
doors or pulling on the handles.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened
from the outside door handle or the switches located
on the B-Pillar trim panel just in front of the power
sliding door when the Child Protection Door Locks
are engaged.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Pro-
tection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
•After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Protection
Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protec-
tion Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside
door handle will open the sliding door when the Child
Protection Door Lock is disengaged.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
(Continued)
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
For models equipped with manual seats, the recline lever
is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Manual Recline Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump
the lever downward to lower the seat height.
1 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever
2 — Recline Lever
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
Recline Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on
the seat cushion.
NOTE:
•The seatback may lock into the fold flat position. Use
the recline lever to unlock the seatback.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•When returning the seat to the original position, the
headrest must be folded back to the original position.
Easy Entry
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat Installed
The 2nd row seats can be tilted forward for easy entry
into the third row with or without a child seat installed.
1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat is a
handle that provides easier access to the third row by
tilting the seat forward.
Fold Headrest To Upward Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2. To put the seat back into original position, just pull
back on the seatback and lock the seat into position.
Easy Tilt Seat Lever Seat Folded Forward With Child Seat Installed
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat. Serious
injury or death my occur.
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more accessibility
for passengers to enter and exit the third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the seat by
pulling the recliner handle on the bottom part of the
seat. Before pulling the recliner lever, make sure the
arm rests are folded up.
2. Pull the strap on the back of the seat and the seat will
tilt forward.
Recliner Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
3. To put it back into position, pull back on the folded
seat and make sure that it locks into position. Then
pull the seatback toward the back and fold down the
arm rests.
Exit For 3rd Row Passengers
For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull
strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the
bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on
the strap and push the seat forward for folding the
seatback down and tilting the seat to the floor.
Pull Strap
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: This process is for when there is no child seat
installed. Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is
installed.
Stow ’n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
Stow ‘n Go Assist — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with the Stow ‘n Go Assist feature,
the front seat will move forward automatically to a
location that will allow the second row Stow ‘n Go seat
movement, without interference by the front seat. After
the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement is completed,
the front seat will automatically move back to the previ-
ous location once the Stow ‘n Go Assist button is pushed
again.
The Stow ‘n Go Assist feature is available to both the
front driver and passenger power seats.
WARNING!
During power seat operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the front seat is not
occupied and the seat travel path is clear.
A one-touch Stow ‘n Go Assist button is located on the
B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Using the Stow ‘n Go Assist Feature
NOTE:
•The button is only functional when the power sliding
door is open and the vehicle is in PARK. If the door is
not open or the vehicle is not in PARK when the button
is pushed, the front seat will not move and a message
will be displayed in Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Drivers Information Display (DID).
•If the power sliding door is closing when the button is
pushed, the front seat will not move and a message
will be displayed in the EVIC or DID.
1. Push and release the Stow ‘n Go Assist button. The
front seat cushion and seat back will move as neces-
sary to a location that will allow space for the second
row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.
Stow ‘n Go Assist button
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Perform the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.
Refer to “Second Row Stow ‘n Go” for further infor-
mation.
3. Push and release the Stow ‘n Go Assist button a
second time. The front seat cushion and seat back will
return to the original starting location.
NOTE:
•To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press
the Stow n’ Go Assist button, or press the front power
seat button to stop the seat movement. Pushing the
Stow ‘n Go Assist button again will return the front
seat to the original starting location.
•The Stow ‘n Go Assist system includes obstacle detec-
tion. When the system detects an obstacle, the seat will
stop, reverse direction, and return to the previous
location. A message will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster indicating that an obstacle has been
detected.
•If the front seat is already in a location that will allow
space for Stow ‘n Go of the second row seat, the front
seat will not move and a message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
•If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat will
automatically re-calibrate when the Stow ‘n Go Assist
button is pushed. This may result in the seat cushion
moving forward and downward, before moving to the
location that will allow space for the second row Stow
‘n Go seat movement.
Second Row Stow ’n Go
For Manual Seats: To stow the seat in the floor, move the
front seat all the way forward using the manual seat
adjustment bar. Move the seat back all the way forward
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
using the recliner handle located on the outboard side of
the cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid position
using the height adjuster handle in the outboard side of
the cushion.
For Power Seats: Push the Stow ‘n Go Assist button
located on the B pillar trim (if equipped.) Refer to ⬙Stow
’n Go Assist - If Equipped⬙in this section for instructions.
1. To access the storage bin, place the lock rod in the
locked position.
NOTE:
•Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
•Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.
Lock Rod
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•For information on storage bin function with the
seats rearward refer to “Second Row Floor Storage
Bins” in “Internal Equipment” for further informa-
tion.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open
the floor panel.
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats while folding the top half down and rest it
against the front seats.
Floor Latch
Push Panel Forward
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
4. Stow the seat by grabbing the strap on the lower part
of the back seat and guide the seat into the tub.
5. Push down on the seat back to lock the seat in the tub.
Pull Strap
Push To Lock
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel backwards
by the bottom corner edge of the panel.
7. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.
8. Readjust the front seat as needed.
Extend Floor Panel
Push To Lock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
CAUTION!
•The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat
tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
•Do not sit on the second row seat when it is in the
stowed position with the seatback upright other-
wise damage to the seat may occur.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched:
•Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
•Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
To Unstow Second Row Seats
For Manual Seats: To unstow the seat from the floor,
move the front seat all the way forward using the manual
seat adjustment bar.
For Power Seats: Push the Stow ‘n Go Assist button
located on the B pillar trim (if equipped). Refer to ⬙Stow
’n Go Assist - If Equipped⬙in this section for instructions.
1. To access the storage bin, place the lock rod in the
locked position.
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
•Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open
the floor panel.
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats while folding the top half down and rest it
against the front seats.
Lock Rod
Floor Latch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the seat out
of the storage bin. Push the seat rearward making sure
that it locks into the floor. Fold the seatback into the
upright position and pull the headrest up.
NOTE: The seatback may be locked, if it is, it will be
necessary to use the recliner handle to unlock the back
before folding into the upright position.
5. To position the floor panel back into its original state,
grab the bottom corner and extend it outward.
Push Panel Forward
Pull Strap
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it clicks
into position. Replace the floor mat as needed.
7. Readjust the front seat as needed.
Extend Panel Push Down To lock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING!
•In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
•Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Second Row Removable 8th Seat — If Equipped
While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it is foldable
and removable for added cargo space.
The release strap is located on the front of the seat, near
the floor. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to
release the rear latches. The seat assembly can now be
removed from the vehicle by moving it in a rearward
direction from the detent positions in the floor.
Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Seat can be removed easier with one outboard
seat stowed in the load floor.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent posi-
tions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back
into its original position.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
Personal injuries could result.
Release Strap In Floor Detent Guides
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback
by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the
head restraint down.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the anchors.
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
Release Strap “1”
Strap “2”
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the
anchors latch.
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
Stowed Third Row Seat
Strap “2”
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING!
•In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
•Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
•Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
•Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
•Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the trim panel next
to the seat, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
for occupant comfort.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward button,
the seat will move in the direction of the button press.
Release the button when the desired position is reached.
Third Row Power Stow ‘n Go Seat — If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
right rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•The outer head restraints will lower automatically as
necessary when the power seat begins to move.
•The center head restraint raises and lowers manually
but will not lower automatically.
•The head restraint can also be lowered manually using
the pull strap located at the back off the seat. Refer to
⬙Head Restraints - Third Row⬙in ⬙Head Restraints⬙for
further information.
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open
and the vehicle is in PARK.
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open To Normal 3 — Fold Forward/Rearward
2 — Stow 4 —
Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
To move the selected seat(s) to the Normal (seated)
position, push and release the Normal button. The seat
will automatically stop when the Normal position is
reached.
To move the selected seat(s) to the stow position, push
and release the Stow button. The seat will automatically
stop when the Stow position is reached.
To move the selected seat(s) back in the forward or
reverse direction, push and hold the Fold forward or
rearward button. Release the button when the desired
position is reached.
NOTE:
•Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small
buckle before attempting to fold/stow the power third
row seats.
•To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push a
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
can be selected.
•The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the
motors will stop and reverse direction. Should this
occur, remove the obstacle before pushing the button
again.
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, outside
mirrors, and radio station preset settings. Your Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fobs can also be programmed
to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is
pushed.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE key
fobs, one RKE key fob can be linked to each of the
memory positions.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors and radio
station presets).
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Driver Memory Switch
1 — Memory Button 1
2 — Set Button
3 — Memory Button 2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Dis-
play (DID) will display which memory position has
been set.
NOTE:
•Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
•To set a memory profile to your RKE Key Fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your RKE Key Fob can be programmed to recall one of
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE Key Fob you
must select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob”
feature through the Uconnect Settings. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
To program your RKE Key Fob, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key
Fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE Key Fob can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC or
DID.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, push
MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob linked to Memory Position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat stop moving.
A delay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
NOTE: Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the
memory mirror recall.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
key from the ignition switch.
•When the ignition switch transitions to the LOCK
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when the ignition switch transtions out of the
LOCK position.
•When the ignition switch transitions out of the LOCK
position, the driver seat will move to a position 0.3
inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver
seat position is between 0.9 – 2.7 inches (22.7 – 67.7
mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when the ignition switch tran-
sitions out of the LOCK position.
•The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit Position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled
or disabled through the programmable features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). For further information refer
to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel”.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting ON.
•Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting ON.
•Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-
proximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
•Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
•The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
•Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING! (Continued)
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time
•Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
second row passengers to operate the seats indepen-
dently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding
side door handle trim panels.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push the
switch a second time to select LO-level heating. Push the
switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the dis-
play will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the first row seat cushions are small fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
•Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
•Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
•Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of the first and third
row rear seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint. Front head re-
straints are also adjustable forward and rearward.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to
fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
WARNING!
•A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
•ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Head Restraints — Second Row
The second row outboard head restraints are non-
adjustable. The removable 8th passenger seat (if
equipped) has an adjustable head restraint.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually folded
forward for improved visibility while in reverse. Pull the
release strap to fold them forward.
Release Strap
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
•Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing or height adjustment. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further informa-
tion.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints — If
Equipped
For improved visibility, the third row outboard head
restraints can be folded using the Uconnect System.
Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
Press the Head Restraint Fold button
to power fold
the third row head restraints.
NOTE:
•The head restraints can be folded downward using the
Head Restraint button or using the manual release
strap. The head restraints must be raised manually
when occupying the third row.
•Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located left of the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
approximately 120 minutes before automatically shutting
off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may
not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect controls screen.
•Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element ON.
•Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
•Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
•Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver to
adjust up, down and left, right. Mirror should be ad-
justed to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto-
matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
•Full forward position
•Full rearward position
•Normal position
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions
can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat
Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Seats” for
further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
Power Mirror Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
ground rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside
mirror will move slightly downward from the present
position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The
driver’s outside mirror will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
position. Each stored memory setting will have an asso-
ciated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver’s
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
will automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
•The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
•The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
•The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
•The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Illuminated Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
Conversation Mirror
Located in the overhead console there is a conversation
mirror to view all the passengers in the vehicle. Push the
panel to release the drop down mirror. Raise the mirror
and push to latch it back in the stowed position.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
interior lights and the fog lights.
Conversation Mirror
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the second
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the third detent
for headlight, parking light and instrument panel opera-
tion.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme clockwise position
aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the headlight
switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay
feature is also on. This means your headlights will stay
on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch
OFF. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the headlight
switch counterclockwise to the O (OFF) position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the Automatic mode.
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Ambient Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
4 — Fog Lamps Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE: The Headlights with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. The 90 second delay
interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not
remain on. To change the timer setting, select the proper
setting through the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45
seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this
feature.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on after the
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will
illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a
constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned
OFF. If the parking brake is applied, the Daytime Run-
ning Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn signal is
activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle
will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation.
Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp
will illuminate.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights
or the low beam headlights and push in the headlight
switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch con-
trol knob in a second time will turn the front fog lights
off.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column. The multifunction lever controls the
turn signals, headlight beams and flash-to-pass func-
tions.
Fog Lights Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound and
a message will display in the cluster to alert the driver.
Multifunction Lever
1 — Turn Signals
2 — Headlight Beams Low/High
3 — Flash-To-Pass
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi-
function lever toward the instrument panel will switch
from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the
neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam
operation.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam system provides increased
forward lighting at night by automating high beam
control through the use of a digital camera mounted on
the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light
and automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE: Broken, muddy or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the windshield
or camera lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly.
To Activate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
Uconnect system. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO (A) position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to
“Multifunction Lever” in this section for further infor-
mation.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Deactivate
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
Automatic High Beam system.
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam
position.
3. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
to the on position.
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights or parking lights are
left on for extended periods of time when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position. After eight minutes of the
ignition switch being in the LOCK position and the
headlight switch in any position other than OFF or
AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically until the next
cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the eight minute delay.
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the courtesy
lights On/Off.
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver’s or
passenger light switch.
NOTE:
•Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior
lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from
discharging once the doors are closed.
•If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is in the
STOP/OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/reading
lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding
door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped
with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn
on when the UNLOCK button ON the RKE Key Fob is
pushed.
Courtesy Light Switches
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push
the lens to turn these lights ON while inside the vehicle.
Push the lens a second time to turn each light OFF.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Reading Lights
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down-
ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambi-
ent light located in the overhead console, door handle
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and
cubby bin lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the right (instrument panel) dimmer control to the
off position (extreme bottom). The interior lights will
remain off when the doors or liftgate are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC/DID, and radio when the
position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the wiper lever. Rotate the end of the wiper lever to select
the desired wiper speed.
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
Washer And Wiper Controls
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the wiper lever
to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the
lever to select the desired delay interval. There are four
delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe
interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a
maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles.
The delay intervals will double in duration when the
vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
Windshield Washers
To use the Washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval pre-
viously selected. If the lever is pulled while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate several
wipe cycles, then turn off.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
Mist Feature
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rear Wiper And Washer
Rear Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to
operate the rear window wiper as follows:
•In intermittent mode when the front window wiper is
not operating.
•In continuous mode with reverse engaged.
With the windshield wipers on and reverse gear engaged,
rear window wiping will be continuous in the same way.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever
pushed for more than quarter a second to activate the
rear window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield
wiper lever will activate the smart washing function, as
described for the windshield wipers.
The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is
released.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the four
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this
feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been
calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the opera-
tor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
sensitivity positions 4. If the operator desires less wiping
sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2 or 1.
Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position when
not using the system.
NOTE:
•The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
•The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the wind-
shield.
•Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
•The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
•Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h),
or the outside temperature rises above freezing.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
•Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmis-
sion gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position, and the
vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the
gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
•Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Controls – 3 Zone — If Equipped
Manual Temperature Controls (MTC) Touchscreen
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Manual Climate Controls consist of a series of rotary
dials with inner push buttons.
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system
between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recir-
culation can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Manual Temperature Controls (MTC) Faceplate
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
NOTE:
•Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se-
lect the outside air position for maximum defogging.
•Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost.
•The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-
turbing the mode control selection.
4. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn
ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window
defroster automatically turns OFF after 10 minutes.
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
6. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s tem-
perature will move up with the driver’s temperature,
when it is increased.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button
on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. When
the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature
will move up with the driver’s temperature, when it is
increased.
8. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
9. Mode Control
Push this button to change the system between Modes
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).
•Panel
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
•Bi-Level
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
•Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-
ture on the windshield.
10. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
11. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active,
the driver’s temperature will move down with the pas-
senger’s temperature, when it is decreased.
12. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
warmer temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is
active, the driver’s temperature will move up with the
passenger’s temperature, when it is increased.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129
Rear Manual Temperature Control
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are located
on the headliner on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
1 — Mode Selection Button
2 — Temperature Control buttons
3 — Blower Control Buttons
4 — Rear Climate Control/Blower Off Button
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually ad-
justed to direct the flow of air. Moving the air
vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the
airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and
the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push
temperature control up button to raise and down to
lower and clockwise to increase the temperature. The rear
temperature settings are displayed in control head.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the control head is
illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ig-
nored.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any
fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control but-
tons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) – 3 Zone —
If Equipped
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect screen.
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On
The Touchscreen
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On
The Touchscreen
Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system
between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recir-
culation can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the Automatic Temperature Con-
trol (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are ON.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow
for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow
for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
10. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. The Sync feature also synchronizes the
rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature
setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting
while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
11. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
12. Modes
Push the button in the center of the knob to change the
airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode
can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
•Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137
•Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demis-
ter outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
•Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
•Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-
ture on the windshield.
13. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger, and rear temperature setting at the
same time.
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control Button
Provides the temperature setting for both the driver and
the passenger seating positions, which can be indepen-
dently set after selecting this button.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
•If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
•If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humid-
ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to
recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation con-
trol button. The recirculation indicator will illuminate
when this button is selected. Press the button a second
time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside
air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the
word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC dis-
play, along with two temperatures for the driver and
front passenger. The system will then automatically
regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger, and rear
temperatures. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by chang-
ing the front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST
mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield
and side glass.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
•Press the ⬙REAR CLIMATE⬙button on the touchscreen
to change control to rear control mode, Rear display
(below) will appear. Control functions now operate
rear system.
•To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect 8.4 radio,
press the ⬙Front Climate⬙button on the touchscreen. To
return to the Front screen on the Uconnect 5.0 radio,
press the “Done” button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5.0 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection.
2. Rear Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the rear
seat occupants.
3. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
4. Rear Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets underneath the
passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at each outboard
rear seating position. The system provides heated air
through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
Uconnect 8.4 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143
1. Adjust the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
1 — Mode Control
2 — Temperature Control
3 — Blower Control
4 — Auto Button
5 — Rear Climate Control/Blower Off Button
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control head can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by pushing the blower control
buttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push
the temperature buttons. The rear temperature settings
are displayed in the rear ATC panel.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the ATC panel is
illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ig-
nored.
When the Sync feature is active, the rear temperature is
synchronized to the driver’s temperature setting. If the
rear temperature is changed, the Sync feature will deac-
tivate.
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu-
pants.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 145
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Refer to “Fluids Aand Lubricants” in “Technical Data”
for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Fluids Aand
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for proper coolant selec-
tion. Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter
months is not recommended, because it may cause
window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service
your A/C air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147
Operating Tips Chart
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
Driver Power Window Controls
You can control either the front or rear windows using
controls located on the driver’s door trim panel.
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar control just below the power window
controls.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
Driver’s Power Window Controls
1 — Front Driver And Passenger Window Controls
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149
NOTE: Power Window controls will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and a set of controls that lock and unlock all doors. The
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acces-
sory delay.
Front Passenger Power Door Controls
Front Passenger Power Door Controls
1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
The front driver and front passenger controls may be
equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window
control fully upward to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the control briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window control to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE:
•If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
control again to close the window.
•Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the control lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
NOTE: There is no anti-pinch protection when the win-
dow is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window control up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the control up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 151
2. Push the window control down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the control down for an additional two sec-
onds after the window is fully open.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single control on the door handle
assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
NOTE: The controls will not operate if the driver has
activated the Power Window Lockout.
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Sliding Door Power Window Control
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are
open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRI-PANE VISTA VIEW SUNROOF — IF
EQUIPPED
The Tri-Pane Vista View Sunroof switch is located to the
left between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The Power Shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Tri-Pane Vista View Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
1 — Sunroof Switch
2 — Power Shade Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING!
•Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the switch rearward and release it within one
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actua-
tion of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙button within one second and
the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called
“Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof
position.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
Closing Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within one second
and the sunroof will close automatically from any posi-
tion. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically.
This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 155
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Power Sun Shade — If Equipped
Opening Power Shade — Express Mode
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within one
second and the shade will open automatically from any
position. The shade will open and stop automatically at
the half-open position. Push the shade switch rearward
again and release it within one second and the shade will
open automatically to the full-open position. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation,
any other actuation of the shade switch will stop the
shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade — Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within one second
and the shade will close automatically from any position.
If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close
fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any other actua-
tion of the switch will stop the shade.
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
completely.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mu-
litmedia” for further information.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 157
HOOD
Opening
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and
safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be re-
leased to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the passen-
ger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is located
behind the center front edge of the hood.
Hood Release Lever
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and
insert it into the seat located on the underside of the
hood.
NOTE:
•Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
•While lifting the hood, use both hands.
•Vehicle must be at a stop and the automatic transmis-
sion must be in park. Manual transmission vehicles
must have the electric park brake engaged.
Closing
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert
it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure
that the hood is completely closed.
Safety Latch Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 159
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
•Overhead console liftgate button
•RKE Key Fob
•Outside handle
Push the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter twice
within five seconds to release the liftgate.
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The RKE Key Fob and the overhead console button will
release the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the out-
side handle will unlock and release the liftgate, with a
valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the
liftgate.
Unlock Liftgate Using An RKE Key Fob
Unlock Liftgate Using Passive Entry
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 161
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”’ is programmed
in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock with a Passive
Entry handle activation. If ‘Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
is programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the liftgate
will unlock. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
Closing
To Close The Vehicle
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lowering the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes over
the closing effort.
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Power
Liftgate button (If Equipped), located in the upper left
trim in the liftgate opening. Pushing button will only
close the liftgate. This button cannot be used to open the
liftgate.
To Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m)
of the liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button
located to the right of the outside handle will lock the
vehicle.
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several
ways:
•Overhead console liftgate button
•RKE Key Fob
•Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
•Button just inside the liftgate on the upper left trim
(when liftgate is open)
•Hands-Free Liftgate – If Equipped
Using the above ways:
•when the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open
•when the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close
•when the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the Overhead Console
to open or close the liftgate.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 163
The RKE Key Fob and the overhead console button will
operate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the out-
side handle or Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation (if
equipped) will unlock and open the liftgate, with a valid
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the
liftgate handle.
NOTE: To open or close the liftgate, the Hands-Free
Liftgate foot activation (if equipped) requires a valid
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the door
handle.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock with a Passive
Entry handle activation. If “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” is programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the
liftgate will unlock. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Overhead Console Power Liftgate Power Switch
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Side Door Lock Switch
4 — Left Sliding Door
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Tones are sounded and the turn signals are
flashed with liftgate movements. These alerts can be
turned on or off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m)
of the liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button
located to the right of the outside handle will lock the
vehicle.
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free activation,
use a gentle straight forward and back kicking motion
under the vehicle activation zone in the general location
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 165
below the liftgate door handle. Do not move your foot
sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not
detect the motion.
Vehicles Equipped With A Trailer Tow Package
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow Pack-
age, the hands-free activation zone(s) for the Power
Liftgate will be located on the left and right side of the
receiver. Use the same gentile straight kicking motion
under either activation zone to open/close the Hands-
Free Liftgate.
NOTE: To open or close the Hands-Free Liftgate requires
a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the
door handle. If a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob is not
within 3 ft (1 m), the liftgate will not respond to any
kicks.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information. The Hands-
Free Liftgate feature should be turned off during Jack-
ing, Tire Changing, and Service.
NOTE:
•The liftgate will not power open or close if the gear
selector is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 MPH
(0 km/h).
•If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be opened or
closed manually.
•The power liftgate will release, but not power open or
close, in temperatures below −12° F (−24° C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.
•If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to
reset power liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
•Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
NOTE: Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 167
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed position,
there is a large area for cargo storage.
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed,4x8foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.
Rear Cargo Area
168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Stow n’ VAC Integrated Vacuum — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an integrated
vacuum system. The system can clean up dry spills and
debris within the vehicle.
1. Make sure the vehicle is in Park (P) and the ignition is
set to Run/Accessory mode.
NOTE:
•The vacuum system will run for 10 minutes off
battery power. At 10 minutes, the vacuum will shut
down and a low battery indication light will come on
one minute before shutdown.
•When the vehicle engine is running, the vacuum will
be capable of continuous operation.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 169
2. Open front vacuum storage compartments to access
the attachments if needed.
3. Pull out the vacuum hose and push the power button
located under the vacuum head. Begin to vacuum
(Dry use only).
Front Storage Compartments
1 — Retractable Vacuum Head/Hose Location
2 — Attachment Compartment Location
Power Buttons
1 — Low Power Indicator Light
2 — On/Off Button
170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vacuum Attachments
•Crevice Tool — Able to reach into tight spots including
the latches located in the floor for the seats.
•Upholstery Tool — Use to agitate dirt and debris from
carpets and seats. This tool can also be used to pick up
pet hair as well.
•Hose Extension — Use to add another 48 inches to the
end of the hose.
Vacuum System Access Panels
1 — Upper Access Panel
2 — Lower Access Panel
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 171
To Remove And Empty The Debris Bin
To access and remove the debris bin, open the lower
access panel by pulling outward on the finger grip area of
the door. For debris bin removal, twist the (color) release
knob counterclockwise and pull the bin towards you.
Remove the filter and dump the debris in the proper
collection bin. Lightly tap the filter on the collection bin
to remove any collected debris from the filter pleats.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall.
NOTE: The filter must be properly installed in the debris
bin before installing the debris bin in the vehicle.
Vacuum Troubleshooting
•If an object(s) become lodged in the hose, first try fully
extending the hose in a straight line while the vacuum
motor is on. If this does not work, then remove the
hose and try to shake it out.
Debris Bin Release Knob
172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•If the filter is clogged, follow the emptying debris bin
procedure and lightly tap the filter on the collection
bin to remove any collected debris from the filter
pleats.
•If filter is in need of replacement, please see your
authorized dealer for a replacement filter.
Precautions While Using Vacuum System
Dry Vac Only
The Vacuum System is meant for dry
vacuuming only. Do Not use to pick
up spilled fluids, which can damage
the Vacuum System.
Flammable / Explosive Liquids And Vapors
Do not vacuum any flammable liquid
spills or around explosive vapors.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 173
WARNING!
Flammable liquids and vapors can be ignited by
heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors from flammable liq-
uids may form an explosive mixture with the air.
Vapors may travel to source of ignition and cause an
explosion. Any disregard of this warning could result
in injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not leave the vacuum running while unattended.
Do not use with a missing or damage filter, as it will
allow debris to pass through the motor and possibly
damage it. Frequently check the filter to insure it is in
place and in good condition.
Carbon Monoxide Gas
Do not leave the vehicle’s liftgate open
if the vehicle is running while the
vacuum is in use.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
(Continued)
174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
WARNING!
Do not pick up anything that is burning or smoking,
such as cigarettes, matches, or hot ashes. Vehicle
damage, personal injury, or death may result from
vacuuming up burning or smoking material.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on the driver’s sunvisor,
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
•Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
•If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons
176 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 177
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.⬙
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 179
•To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non-
Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.⬙
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish
to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
•To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 181
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
•Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
182 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
•Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
•Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 183
NOTE:
•The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment pull out on the release
handle.
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
Release Handle
184 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Instrument Panel Drawer
There is a storage drawer located in the lower center of
the instrument panel. It can be released by pushing the
access button above it. The drawer is actuator assisted
once the access button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to
the fully open position.
Front Door Storage
Drawer Access Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 185
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while driving. If
left open during a collision, additional damage may
occur to property or the drawer mechanism.
Drawer Released Drawer Fully Open
186 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on some
models.
Umbrella Holder
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into
the front door entry scuff moldings.
Front Seatback Storage Umbrella Holder
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 187
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
The area below the load floor, located in front of the
second row seats, is available for storage.
1. To access the storage bin with front seats in the
rearward position, place the lock rod in the unlocked
position so the load floor can fold upwards towards
the seatback.
In Floor Storage Location Lock Rod
188 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
•Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open
the floor panel.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
(Continued)
Floor Latch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 189
CAUTION! (Continued)
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front
seat adjustment may damage the cover.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
•Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
•Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
•Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
•Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
young children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
•In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
190 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
•Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front
seat adjustment may damage the cover.
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an
Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mecha-
nism.
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mecha-
nism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 191
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Coat Hook
Illuminated Mirror
192 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Screens — If Equipped
Sun screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the
top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Retracted
Sun Screen Extended
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 193
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB power outlets, that can
be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and
other low powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets can be labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”
symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power
outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the
ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets
labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the
battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
•All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
•To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR
knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
194 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The front power outlet is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel.
In addition to the front power outlets, there is also a
power outlet located in the rear cargo area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
12 Volt Front Power Outlet
Front USB Charge Only Port
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 195
NOTE: The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument
panel can be switched from “ignition” only to constant
“battery” powered all the time. See your local authorized
dealer for details.
Rear Power Outlet Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F95A-F95B USB IP 10A
2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
196 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•Do not touch with wet hands.
•Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
•If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
•Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
•After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet located
on the right side of the vehicle, before the third row of
seats to convert DC current to AC current. The Power
Inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and other
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 197
low power devices requiring up to 150 Watts. Certain
high-end video game consoles will exceed this power
limit, as will most power tools.
The Power Inverter will automatically turn on and off
when the device is plugged in or removed.
The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the Power Inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the Power
Inverter it will automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the Power Inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•Do not touch with wet hands.
•Close the lid when not in use.
•If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
115 Volt Power Inverter
198 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
NOTE: Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through MOPAR parts. To ensure proper cigar
lighter operation, a MOPAR knob and element must be
used.
The cigar lighter is located at the bottom of the instru-
ment panel. Push lighter inward to heat.
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically returns to
its initial position and is ready to be used.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with
care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned
off.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt
(15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protect-
ing the system will need to be replaced.
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center floor console. To
install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb
grip on the lid is facing rearward. Push the ash receiver
into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull upward on the
ash receiver to remove for cleaning and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom-
modate a second ash receiver, if desired.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 199
Overhead Storage With Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to open the
compartment.
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
Over Head Sunglass Door Latch
Full Open Position
200 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 201
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Deploying The Crossbars
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Thumb Screw
202 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to
keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw
down.
Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on
the side rail.
Removing Crossbars
Bending Pivot
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 203
Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both thumb screws
completely.
Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the
deployment of the crossbars.
NOTE: The crossbars are not identical and have fixed
deployment positions. Rear crossbar can deployed in two
different positions.
Positioning Crossbars Installing Crossbars
204 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Stowing The Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Lift the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot sup-
ports at each end.
Crossbar Pivot
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 205
Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Stowing Crossbars
Crossbar To Side Rail
206 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the
opposite side.
Tightening Crossbar Stowed Crossbars
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 207
NOTE:
•To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
•If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interrup-
tion of satellite radio reception.
CAUTION!
•To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
ately.
•Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratchet-
ing mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
•Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
208 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 209
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................212
▫Instrument Cluster Descriptions ...........214
䡵DISPLAY .............................215
▫Instrument Cluster Display Location and
Controls ............................215
▫Oil Change Reset .....................217
▫KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped . . .218
▫EVIC/DID Display Menu Items ...........219
▫Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If
Equipped ...........................226
䡵TRIP COMPUTER ......................229
䡵
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . .230
▫Red Telltale Lights ....................231
▫Yellow Telltale Lights ...................243
▫Green Telltale Lights ...................254
▫Blue Telltale Lights ....................258
▫White Telltale Lights ...................259
䡵ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .261
▫Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ........................262
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
3.5” EVIC Instrument Cluster
212 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7” DID Instrument Cluster
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
For 3.5” EVIC Cluster and 7” DID Cluster
1. Tachometer
•Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. 3.5” EVIC / 7” DID Information Display
•When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the 3.5” EVIC OR 7” DID messages. Refer to
“Display” located in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
•Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
•The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
•The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
•The gauge can indicate a higher temperature when
driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of
the normal operating range.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reaches “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the
(Continued)
214 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING! (Continued)
gauge drops back into the normal range and is no
longer red. If the gauge remains on the “H”, turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer
for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining And
Caring For Your Vehicle”.
DISPLAY
The vehicle can be equipped with a Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), or a Driver Information Dis-
play (DID), which offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for viewing,
and display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer.
Instrument Cluster Display Location and Controls
The 3.5” EVIC and 7” DID feature a driver-interactive
display that is located in the center of the instrument
cluster.
The EVIC/DID Main Menu items consists of the follow-
ing:
•Speedometer
•Vehicle Info
•Driver Assist — 7” DID
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
•Fuel Economy Info
•Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
•Audio
•Navigation
•Messages
•Screen Setup
•Speed Warning — 7” DID
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel: •UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
Instrument Cluster Display (EVIC/DID) Control Buttons
216 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu
items.
•RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
•BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
•OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset
•Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the instrument cluster display for approxi-
mately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
•Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the
following procedure.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
•To reset the oil change indicator after performing the
scheduled maintenance, refer to the following proce-
dure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped
When the KeySense key is in use there will be:
•Continuous, dedicated telltale
•Unique Display Splash Screen
Push Button Ignition
218 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
With KeySense in use there will be multiple associated
messages shown in the following table:
Setting Cluster Display Message
None – With
vehicle igni-
tion ON
“KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed
set to xx MPH/or km/h”
Max Vehicle
Speed
•“Max speed reached. KeySense in
use” supported by a chime
•“Approaching max speed xx
MPH/km” supported by a chime
Start Up Fuel
Alert message
“Range to empty xxx miles or km”
Early Low
Fuel Alert
Message
“Fuel Low”
ParkSense “Feature cannot be disabled. Key-
Sense in use”
Setting Cluster Display Message
Blind Spot “Feature cannot be disabled. Key-
Sense in use”
Forward Col-
lision Warn-
ing
“Feature cannot be disabled. Key-
Sense in use”
EVIC/DID Display Menu Items
NOTE: The EVIC/DID menu items display in the center
of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary depend-
ing on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC/
DID. Push and release the OK button to toggle be-
tween MPH and km/h.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC/
DID. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to
scroll through the following information submenus:
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Safety” for further information.
•Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
•Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Only
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
•Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
•Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
220 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life (Hold OK Button To Reset)
The “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be displayed at
all times, but the following conditions will need to be met
in order to reset Oil Life:
The vehicle’s engine must be off
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
•If the conditions are met, holding the OK button will
reset the gauge and the numeric display will return to
100%.
•If the conditions are not met, a popup message will
display for 5 seconds, describing the required condi-
tions, and then the Oil Life screen will reappear.
•Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Driver Assist (7” DID)
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Driver Assist display icon is highlighted in
the DID cluster display. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in
the EVIC/DID. The Fuel Economy Menu will display
the following:
•Two sub menu pages that can be toggled between
using the LEFT
and RIGHT arrow buttons;
one with Current value displayed and one without
the Current Value displayed (for DID only):
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
•Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.
Trip Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC/
DID. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to
scroll through the Trip A and Trip B submenus. The
Trip information will display the following:
•Distance
•Average Fuel Economy
•Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.
Navigation
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destina-
tion is reached.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.
This feature shows the number of stored warning
messages. Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will
allow you to see what the stored messages are.
222 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC/
DID. Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
EVIC Screen Setup Options:
Upper Right
•None
•Compass
•Outside Temp. (Default)
•Time
•Range
•Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
•Current MPG (or L/100km, or km/L)
1. Upper Left
•None
•Compass (Default)
•Outside Temp.
•Time
•Range
•Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
•Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
2. Center
•None
•Compass
•Outside Temp.
•Time
•Range
•Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
•Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
•Trip A Distance
•Trip B Distance
•Audio
•Menu Title (Default)
•Digital Speed
3. Current Gear
•On
•Off (Default)
4. Defaults
•Restore
•Cancel
DID Screen Setup Options:
1. Lower Left
•None
•Compass (Default)
•Outside Temp.
•Time
•Range
•Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
•Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
•Trip A Distance
•Trip B Distance
2. Center
•None
•Compass
•Outside Temp.
•Time
•Range
•Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
•Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
•Trip A Distance
•Trip B Distance
224 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Audio
•Digital Speed
•Menu Title (Default)
3. Lower Right
•None
•Compass
•Outside Temp. (Default)
•Time
•Range
•Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
•Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
•Trip A Distance
•Trip B Distance
4. Current Gear
•On
•Off (Default)
5. Odometer
•Show
•Hide (Odometer will still appear when door is open)
6. Defaults
•Restore
•Cancel
Speed Warning — If Equipped (7” DID)
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Speed Warning Menu title is highlighted in
the DID. Push and release the OK button to enter
speed warning. Use the UP or DOWN arrow
button to turn the speed warning ON or OFF, then
push and release the OK button to confirm the selec-
tion. If the ON status is selected, use the UP or
DOWN arrow button to set the desired speed, then
press the OK button to set the speed for the speed
warning. A speed warning telltale will illuminate in
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
the instrument cluster, with a number matching the set
speed, with a pop up message to inform the driver
that the speed warning has been set to the desired
speed. Each time the set speed is exceeded, an audible
chime will sound for up to 10 seconds, or until the
speed is no longer exceeded. The telltale in the instru-
ment cluster will also change from white to yellow,
and a pop up warning message will pop up on the 7”
DID screen.
NOTE: Speed Warning is unavailable while KeySense is
in use.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the
driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by
reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID).
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a
rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
226 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
•The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
•If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to
“Battery Charge Warning Light” in ”Warning/
Indicator Lights And Messages” located in ”Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected
by load reduction:
•Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
•Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
•Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
•HVAC System
•115V AC Power Inverter System
•Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
•The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of charging system.
The charging system is still functioning properly.
•Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, tow-
ing, frequent stopping).
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
•Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
•Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
•The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
•The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
•The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
•The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
•Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12V, 115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
•Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
228 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
•The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
not help to identify the cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID). Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button until “Trip Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and
push the RIGHT arrow button. Push and release
the UP or DOWN arrow buttons to highlight
one of the following functions if you want to reset it:
Trip A
•Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the
last reset.
•Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the
last reset.
Trip B
•Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the
last reset.
•Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the
last reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is
selected (highlighted). Push and hold the OK button to
clear the resettable function being displayed.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IMPORTANT: The warning/indicator light switches on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
230 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains un-
buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
232 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
NOTE: Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
234 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the en-
gine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches ⬙H,⬙this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to reach ⬙H.⬙In this
case, a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes du-
ration is expired, whichever come first.
236 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re-
fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
238 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
240 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Continuous driving with the Transmission Tem-
perature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
NOTE: If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale Light What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn on when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Hood Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
242 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Lights
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
•The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
•Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
•The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
244 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Electronic Park Brake Fail Light
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Electronic Park Brake Fail Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation.
The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the system senses the lane has been approached and
is in a lane departure situation.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.
246 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
This light indicates a potential system fault with the FCW system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
248 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Forward Collision Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
250 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immedi-
ate service is required.
NOTE: A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer-
enced above, can reach higher temperatures than in
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as
dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
252 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
NOTE: The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warn-
ing have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermar-
ket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket
tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using
an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Green Telltale Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green
Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as se-
lected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
254 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the EVIC/DID and a torque warning
in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped⬙in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light What It Means
KeySense Indicator Light
The KeySense indicator is solid green when a KeySense key is detected upon startup of the
vehicle. The indicator will remain lit for the entire key cycle as a reminder that the Key-
Sense key is in use. While the KeySense key is in use, the vehicle will respond to a separate
specific set of settings associated with the KeySense profile. Refer to “Keys⬙in “Getting to
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and the target ve-
hicle is detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and there is no target
vehicle detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙for further information.
256 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Blue Telltale Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙scenario.
258 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has
been turned on and in the READY state. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when none or
only the left or right lane marking has been detected. The indicator will turn green when
both lanes are detected and the system will be ready to provide visual warnings in the in-
strument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped⬙in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but a speed has not been
set..
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light What It Means
Electronic Speed Control SET Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control speed has been set. Refer to “Speed
Control — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
260 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
White Warning
Light What It Means
Speed Warning Light
When Speed Warning is turned on the speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster, with a number matching the set speed. Each time the set speed is exceeded, an
audible chime will sound for up to 10 seconds, or until the speed is no longer exceeded. The
telltale in the instrument cluster will also change from white to yellow, and a pop up warn-
ing message will pop up on the EVIC/DID screen. Speed Warning can be turned on and off
in the EVIC/DID, for further information refer to “EVIC/DID Display Menu Items” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
262 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
•ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
•If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
•Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
•Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices” and
“Uconnect CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Ac-
cess” in your Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and
“Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵ACTIVE SAFETY FEATURES...............266
▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............266
▫Electronic Brake Control System ...........268
▫Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . .278
▫Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ...............289
▫Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .......293
䡵OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .........302
▫Occupant Restraint Systems Features .......302
▫Important Safety Precautions .............302
▫Seat Belt Systems .....................304
▫Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........321
▫Child Restraints ......................346
▫Transporting Pets .....................373
䡵SAFETY TIPS .........................373
▫Transporting Passengers .................373
▫Exhaust Gas .........................374
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................375
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle .........................377
5
ACTIVE SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS acti-
vates:
•The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
•The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
•Brake pedal pulsations.
•A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
•The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
(Continued)
266 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
•Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
•The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
•The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
5
SAFETY 267
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST).
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen-
tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
268 SAFETY
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
5
SAFETY 269
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
270 SAFETY
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
•Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
5
SAFETY 271
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
•Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
•Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
272 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally al-
lowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by
momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button to enter
partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the situation
requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back
on by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. This
may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
5
SAFETY 273
WARNING!
•When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
tem is reduced.
•Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
274 SAFETY
NOTE:
•The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•The feature must be enabled.
•The vehicle must be stopped.
•Park brake must be off.
•Driver door must be closed.
•The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
5
SAFETY 275
•The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
•HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-
hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-
tion is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
•If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
(Continued)
276 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-
tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
•HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
•Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
Rainy Brake Support (RBS)
Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the wind-
shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
5
SAFETY 277
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
278 SAFETY
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
•The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
•The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in false
Rear Detection Zones
5
SAFETY 279
detections. The BSM warning light may even remain
illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward
gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
If the system detects degraded performance due to
contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn
you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in
side view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will
remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are
met. First clear the fascia area around the sensors of the
Sensor Location
280 SAFETY
blockage. After removing the blockage, the following
procedure can be used to reset the system:
•Cycle the ignition from on to off and then back on.
•Ensure that the system detects a blind spot target on
each side while driving above 6 mph (10 km/h).
If the blockage message is still present after cycling the
ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” in this section for further
information. The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Warning Light Location
5
SAFETY 281
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
282 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
5
SAFETY 283
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, snow banks, car washes etc. However, occasion-
ally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal
operation and your vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects
284 SAFETY
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Opposing Traffic
5
SAFETY 285
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver. Additionally, if
the host vehicle is obscured by a flat object on one side
the system can false alert on vehicles approaching from
the opposite direction.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
(Continued)
RCP Detection Zones
286 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
5
SAFETY 287
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
•The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
•The BSM system can work in conjunction with the
Keysense function of the vehicle if equipped. Refer to
“Keysense Features⬙in “Getting To Know Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
288 SAFETY
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
— If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply
a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide the maxi-
mum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitiga-
tion event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
5
SAFETY 289
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
•The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
•The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
•It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
•The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
FCW Message
290 SAFETY
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
The forward collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect settings.
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On,” this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the sys-
tem, so no warning or active braking will be available in
case of a possible collision
Changing the status of the system is only possible with
the vehicle at a complete stop.
NOTE:
•The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key
cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
•FCW can work in conjunction with the Keysense
function of the vehicle if equipped. Refer to “Keysense
Features⬙in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
5
SAFETY 291
The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the Active Braking is in the “On” setting. This allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙setting. This
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible
collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front when the distance between the
vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides
less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking ad-
equately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
NOTE:
•The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
•FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
•FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
292 SAFETY
FCW Limited Warning
If the EVIC/DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Function-
ality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking
may not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:
•ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
•Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Maintaining
And Caring For Your Vehicle” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
5
SAFETY 293
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
294 SAFETY
CAUTION!
•The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
•Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
•After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
•The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underin-
flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
•The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
5
SAFETY 295
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light”.
•Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•Receiver Module
•Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙message will be displayed and
a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙message. Once the
296 SAFETY
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
5
SAFETY 297
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙messages will turn on
upon the next ignition cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound
and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
298 SAFETY
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•Receiver Module
•Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
•Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the EVIC/DID will
display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙message and a graphic showing
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
5
SAFETY 299
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
EVIC/DID will return to their original color, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will
display a ⬙SERVICE SYSTEM⬙message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro-
viding the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE SYSTEM
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
300 SAFETY
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will remain on and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the EVIC/DID will still
display a different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate
to XX⬙message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a “SER-
VICE SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE SYSTEM” mes-
sage for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in
the EVIC/DID will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
SAFETY 301
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
•Seat Belt Systems
•Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
•Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
302 SAFETY
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 303
WARNING! (Continued)
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermit-
tent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
304 SAFETY
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buck-
led. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccu-
pied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
5
SAFETY 305
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
•In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
306 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
•It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
•A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
•A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 307
WARNING! (Continued)
•A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
•A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
308 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
5
SAFETY 309
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
310 SAFETY
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it
up or down to the position that serves you best.
5
SAFETY 311
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Third Row Center Belt Operating Instructions
The third row center seat belt features a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to
detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.
The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
stored out of the way in the headliner for added conve-
nience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind
the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
Adjustable Anchorage
312 SAFETY
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position in the headliner slightly
behind the third row seat.
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
Mini-Latch Plate
5
SAFETY 313
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head
restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Mini-Latch And Buckle Connected
Connect Mini-Latch To Buckle
314 SAFETY
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
5
SAFETY 315
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into
the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt
will automatically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-
latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed
position.
WARNING!
•If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
•When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
316 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
•ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
•Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
5
SAFETY 317
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) —
If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
318 SAFETY
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
7 Passenger With Stow N Go Second Row Seats
8 Passenger With Stow N Go Second Row Seats
•ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
5
SAFETY 319
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
320 SAFETY
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
•The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
•Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
•Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•Air Bag Warning Light
•Steering Wheel and Column
•Instrument Panel
•Knee Impact Bolsters
•Advanced Front Air Bags
•Supplemental Side Air Bags
•Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•Front and Side Impact Sensors
5
SAFETY 321
•Seat Belt Pretensioners
•Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•Seat Track Position Sensors
•Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
322 SAFETY
WARNING!
•Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
5
SAFETY 323
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
•No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
•Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
324 SAFETY
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occu-
pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
5
SAFETY 325
•Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
•Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo-
cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas-
senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commu-
nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop-
erly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the OCS estimates that:
•The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
•The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child; or
•The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
•The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
326 SAFETY
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deploy-
ment
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child re-
straint or booster seat*
Reduced-power deploy-
ment OR Full-power de-
ployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
ployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deploy-
ment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front pas-
senger seat.
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
•Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the
5
SAFETY 327
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
•Sitting upright
•Facing forward
•Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
•Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Seated Properly
328 SAFETY
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in
a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a full-power deploy-
ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
•The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
ment panel).
•The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
•The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
•The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
•Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
•Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
•Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
5
SAFETY 329
•Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
330 SAFETY
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
5
SAFETY 331
WARNING!
•If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
signal to the OCS that is different from the occu-
pant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
•Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
•Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
•Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly
332 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the
floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com-
ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
•Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
•Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
•Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
5
SAFETY 333
•At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
•Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
•Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
334 SAFETY
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
5
SAFETY 335
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
336 SAFETY
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
•Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
•Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
5
SAFETY 337
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
•Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
•Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
•Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
338 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a roll-
over or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side
5
SAFETY 339
Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of
the vehicle.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
•As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
340 SAFETY
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
•Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
•Cut off fuel to the engine.
•Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
•Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
•Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
5
SAFETY 341
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
342 SAFETY
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
•The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
•The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the in-
strument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
5
SAFETY 343
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light, refer to “Warning/Indicator Lights and
Messages” in “Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel”
section of this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
•Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
344 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
5
SAFETY 345
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
346 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
call 1-866-732-8243.
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
5
SAFETY 347
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and
Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child re-
straint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
348 SAFETY
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
5
SAFETY 349
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
350 SAFETY
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
•Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
•After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
5
SAFETY 351
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
352 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
5
SAFETY 353
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
354 SAFETY
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
7 Passenger With Stow N Go
8 Passenger With Stow N Go
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 355
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint.
356 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions
Can two child restraints be at-
tached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more
information.
5
SAFETY 357
Frequently Asked Questions
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes The 2nd row head restraints on
bench and fixed quad seats and in
the center seat (if equipped), are
removable. 2nd row outboard stow
’n go head restraints are not re-
movable. The 3rd row center head
restraint is removable in all ve-
hicles, but the 3rd row outboard
head restraints are not removable.
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint in-
terferes with the installation of the child restraint, the
head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed
in front of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
358 SAFETY
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
5
SAFETY 359
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located be-
hind all second row seating positions. The third
row has a tether anchor on the 40% seat for the
right outboard position and in the center of the 60% seat
for either the center or left outboard seating position. All
tether anchorages are located on the back of the seat, near
the floor.
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages
Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
360 SAFETY
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third
row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right
outboard position behind the front passenger (1). An-
chorages C and D are used for the center seating position
(2). The left outboard position (3) does not have lower
anchorages. Do not install a child restraint using anchor-
ages B and C. This is not a LATCH position in your
vehicle.
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
Center Seat LATCH Positions
5
SAFETY 361
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
•Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH-
compatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
•Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System”
for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To install a LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
362 SAFETY
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
5
SAFETY 363
WARNING!
•Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.
364 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
7 Passenger With Second Row Stow N Go Seats
8 Passenger With Second Row Stow N Go Seats
•ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 365
Frequently Asked Question About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The 2nd row head restraints on bench and
fixed quad seats, and in the center seat (if
equipped) are removable. 2nd row stow ’n
go head restraints are not removable. The
3rd row center head restraint is removable
in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard
head restraints are not removable.
366 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint in-
terferes with the installation of the child restraint, the
head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed
in front of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
5
SAFETY 367
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
368 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
Tether Anchorage Attachment
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
5
SAFETY 369
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row
370 SAFETY
WARNING!
•An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
•If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60% seat in
the third row may be used by either the left outboard or
the center seating position. Only tether one child restraint
to the tether anchorage at a time.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Second Row
Anchorage Shown)
5
SAFETY 371
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchorage
for either seating position on the 60% third row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center head
restraint and route the tether strap around the inboard
(right) side of the head restraint support posts, as
shown in the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Center Tether Strap Attachment – 3rd row
372 SAFETY
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than one
child restraint to the tether anchorage on the 60% seat
in the third row. This anchorage is intended for one
child restraint at a time.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
Outboard Tether Strap Attachments – 3rd Row
5
SAFETY 373
WARNING!
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
•Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
374 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
•If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
5
SAFETY 375
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant
Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
•Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
376 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
•Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
•Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
5
SAFETY 377
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
378 SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵STARTING PROCEDURES ................383
▫Normal Starting.......................383
▫Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ................384
▫Extended Park Starting..................384
▫After Starting — Warming Up The Engine . . . .385
▫If Engine Fails To Start .................385
▫To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button ..................386
䡵ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .386
䡵ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .388
䡵PARKING BRAKE ......................389
▫Electric Park Brake (EPB) ................389
䡵AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............394
▫Ignition Park Interlock ..................396
▫Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .396
▫Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ........396
▫Gear Ranges .........................398
䡵ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ...........404
䡵POWER STEERING .....................404
6
䡵SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .........405
▫To Activate ..........................406
▫To Set A Desired Speed .................407
▫To Vary The Speed Setting ...............407
▫To Accelerate For Passing ...............409
▫To Resume Speed .....................409
▫To Deactivate ........................409
䡵ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................409
▫Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .411
▫Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .412
▫To Activate/Deactivate..................413
▫To Set A Desired ACC Speed .............414
▫To Cancel ...........................415
▫ToTurnOff..........................415
▫To Resume ..........................416
▫To Vary The Speed Setting ...............416
▫Setting The Following Distance In ACC ......419
▫Overtake Aid ........................423
▫ACC Operation At Stop .................423
▫Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu .......424
▫Display Warnings And Maintenance ........425
▫Precautions While Driving With ACC .......428
▫General Information....................432
▫Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode ..............................432
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................436
▫ParkSense Sensors .....................438
▫ParkSense Visual Alert ..................438
▫ParkSense Display .....................438
▫Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........443
▫Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System .............................444
▫Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........445
▫ParkSense System Usage Precautions........445
䡵PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED .........................447
▫ParkSense Sensors .....................449
▫ParkSense Visual Alert ..................449
▫ParkSense Display .....................450
▫Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........459
▫Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .460
▫Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........461
▫ParkSense System Usage Precautions........461
䡵PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................464
▫Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System.....................465
▫Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display.....................467
▫Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display.....................477
䡵LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............487
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
▫LaneSense Operation ...................487
▫Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF............489
▫LaneSense Warning Message..............490
▫Changing LaneSense Status ..............494
䡵PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................494
䡵SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................497
䡵REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...............502
䡵VEHICLE LOADING ....................504
▫Certification Label ....................504
䡵TRAILER TOWING .....................506
▫Common Towing Definitions .............507
▫Trailer Hitch Classification ...............510
▫Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) ............................511
▫Vehicle Loading Chart ..................512
▫Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............514
▫Towing Requirements ..................515
▫Towing Tips .........................520
䡵RECREATIONAL TOWING ...............521
▫Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .521
▫Recreational Towing — All Models .........522
䡵DRIVING TIPS.........................523
▫Driving On Slippery Surfaces .............523
▫Driving Through Water .................524
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-
tor.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driv-
er’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
•Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
•Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC/DID will
display “ACC”),
•Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC/DID
will display “ON/RUN”),
•Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC/DID will
display “OFF”).
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
•Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
WARNING! (Continued)
•If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear
selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the EVIC/DID will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out
of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the passenger’s side headlamp. Follow the
steps below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the pas-
senger’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
passenger’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
•The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.
•The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
•The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Dealer Service” in “Maintaining And Caring For Your
Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the park brake more con-
venient and useful.
The park brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be
certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the park brake in two ways;
•Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
•Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
ture in the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect Settings.
The park brake switch is located in the instrument panel.
To apply the park brake manually, push the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages.
Once the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warn-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on
the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
Electric Park Brake Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
pedal while you apply the park brake, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake
can be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF,
however, it can only be released when the ignition switch
in the ACC or RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will
extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
sion is placed into PARK. Once the park brake is en-
gaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement while the park-
ing brake is engaging.
The park brake will release automatically when the
ignition is cycled to the RUN position, the transmission is
in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the driver seat belt is
buckled.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the RUN position. Press on the brake
pedal, then push the park brake switch momentarily. You
may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You may
also notice a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, The
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The park brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
•When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
•Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
WARNING! (Continued)
•Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
•Driving the vehicle with the parking brake en-
gaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow
the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake
system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
push on the electric park brake switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The BRAKE warning lamp will
illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear
stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the park brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the park brake
will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp
flashing. In this case, urgent service of the electric park
brake system is required. Do not rely on the park brake to
hold the vehicle stationary.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park
Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection
through the “Customer Programmable Features” section
of the “Uconnect Settings”.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
System that will engage the park brake automatically if
the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmis-
sion is not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver
door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no
attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal,
the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the
vehicle from rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open
and brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed,
SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the
rear caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake system,
this can only be done after retracting the Electric Park
Brake actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be
done easily by entering the “Brake Service” through the
“Uconnect Settings” in your vehicle. This menu based
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
system will guide you through the steps necessary to
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake
service.
Brake Service Mode has requirements that must be met in
order to be activated:
•The vehicle must be at a standstill.
•The park brake must be unapplied.
•The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
•Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
•Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
•Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
(Continued)
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
•Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
•When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
WARNING! (Continued)
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
engine can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the trans-
mission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmis-
sion gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW posi-
tion manually downshifts the transmission to a lower
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
gear based on vehicle speed. The transmission gear range
(PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear selector and in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or the
Driver Information Display (DID). To select a gear range,
simply rotate the gear selector. Push down on the gear
selector and then rotate it, to access the L position. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-
tem⬙in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can
be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the cus-
tomer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design,
some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear
only in very specific driving situations and conditions.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
Transmission Gear Selector
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
•Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
•Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-
hicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
WARNING! (Continued)
•When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
•DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicator should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
•With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position (P).
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam-
age due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the ⬙Transmis-
sion Temperature Warning Light⬙will illuminate, a warn-
ing message will appear in the EVIC/DID and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmis-
sion cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
LOW (L)
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will down-
shift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW
position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it
fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumi-
nated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles
[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancella-
tion System. This system is designed to address exhaust
and engine noise. The system relies on four microphones
embedded in the headliner, which monitor exhaust and
engine noise, and assists an onboard frequency generator,
which creates counteracting sound waves in the audio
system’s speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at
idle and during drive.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It
is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
•Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
•If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the
same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can
be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF
button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Speed Control.
The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the
ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator
Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when
not in use.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL
2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL
3 — RESUME
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in
use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET +button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-
tings” in Multimedia” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pushing the SET +button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pushing the SET +button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET -button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pushing the SET -button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pushing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing
the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Speed Control function performs differently. Please
refer to the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
•If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
•If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
•Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
•Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
•Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
quired while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•The ACC system:
•Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
•Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
•Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
•Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
3 minutes the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
•When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
•When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
•When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
•When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
8 — CANCEL
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
•When you apply the brakes.
•When the parking brake is set.
•When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
•When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
•When the brakes are overheated.
•When the driver door is open.
•When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID
displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will
display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET +button or the SET -button and release. The
EVIC/DID will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
•The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display
in the EVIC/DID.
•The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
•The brake pedal is applied.
•The CANCEL button is pushed.
•An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
•The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
•The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
•The vehicle parking brake is applied.
•Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
•Driver door is opened at low speeds.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
•The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
is pushed.
•The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
•The ignition is turned OFF.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
•If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
•ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET +button.
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pushing the SET +button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pushing the SET +button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET -button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pushing the SET -button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pushing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID.
NOTE:
•When you override and push the SET +button or SET
-buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
•When you use the SET -button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
•The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
•The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set-
ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
•The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
•The distance setting is changed.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
•The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
braking capacity. NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the EVIC/DID is a warn-
ing for the driver to take action and does not necessarily
mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Brake Alert
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve-
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to
a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or
apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing Set Speed.
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be cancelled.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system set-
tings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays depends
on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the EVIC/DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC/DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
•System Cancel
•Driver Override
•System Off
•ACC Proximity Warning
•ACC Unavailable Warning
•The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected
after five seconds of no ACC display activity
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and
the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
•Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
•Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
•If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
•Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Ra-
dar Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per-
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil-
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield,
driving directly into the sun and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display “ACC/
FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and
the system will have degraded performance.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full function-
ality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be tempo-
rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
Offset Driving Condition Example
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example ACC Hill Example
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO
MPH/KM) will appear indicating what speed was set.
This light will turn on when the system is turned on via
the On/Off control. It turns green when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pushing the SET +button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pushing the SET +button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET -button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pushing the SET -button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pushing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
•The brake pedal is applied.
•The CANCEL button is pushed.
•The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
•The vehicle parking brake is applied.
•The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
•The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
•The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
•The ignition is turned off.
•The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped
with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may
be automatically applied and released when performing
a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a
possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
•The driver can override the automatic braking func-
tion by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
•Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
•Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
•The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
conditions, and brake capability.
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
•The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the
rear of the vehicle from the left and / or right sides.
•The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
•ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
•The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
•The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
•The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limi-
tations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s oper-
ating speed, a warning will appear within the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense Visual Alert
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the de-
tected obstacle. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat-
ing the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
WARNING ALERTS
Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Arcs —
Left
None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Audible
Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
ParkSense Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will be ON.
NOTE: When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense
System will reject customer input to turn the system OFF
via the hard switch. The EVIC/DID will display ⬙Key-
Sense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled⬙mes-
sage.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”” for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC/DID will display
the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS⬙or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙message for five seconds while the vehicle is in
REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
operate and will read “OFF” over the arcs.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
•Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
•When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
•When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the EVIC/DID
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
•ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position.
•Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
EVIC/DID.
CAUTION!
•ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
•Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmis-
sion, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking maneu-
ver if the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
•The driver can override the automatic braking func-
tion by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
•Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
•Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
•The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
conditions, and brake capability.
•The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the
rear of the vehicle from the left and / or right sides.
•The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
•ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
•The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
•The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
•The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limi-
tations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will
appear in the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi-
mately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense Active
Park Assist System⬙section for further information.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense Visual Alert
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat-
ing the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
WARNING ALERTS
Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Arcs —
Left
None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast Continu-
ous
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
No Tone/Solid Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
No Tone/Flashing Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
ParkSense Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will be ON.
NOTE: When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense
System will reject customer input to turn the system OFF
via the hard switch. The EVIC/DID will display ⬙Key-
Sense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled⬙mes-
sage.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙,⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙,orthe⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙message for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to Reverse and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙or ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙pop up message for
five seconds. After five seconds, a car graphic will be
displayed with ⬙OFF⬙at either the front or rear sensor
location depending on where the fault is detected. The
system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that
is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙,or⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙messages if an object is detected within the five
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer
to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
an authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an
authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
•Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
•When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
•When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for five sec-
onds while the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the appropriate fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the appropriate
fascia/bumper.
•Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
•ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position.
•There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This may cause the automatic brak-
ing application to be delayed.
CAUTION!
•ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
(Continued)
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
•The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
•Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
•Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park-
ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling
the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver
side or passenger side).
NOTE:
•The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
•The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
•During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the sys-
tem will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
•The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
•New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Ac-
tive Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs
accurately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will also continuously perform the dy-
namic vehicle calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns off).
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
•The parking maneuver is completed.
•Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
•Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
•Touching the steering wheel during active steering
guidance into the parking space.
•Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
switch.
•The Driver’s door is opened.
•The liftgate is opened.
•Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
•The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper-
ate and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
•The gear position is in DRIVE.
•The ignition is in the RUN position.
•The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
•The Driver’s door is closed.
•The liftgate is closed.
•Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the DID will instruct the driver to
slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver
must then reactivate the system by pushing the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
•The outer surface and the underside of the front and
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Perpen-
dicular Park” message will appear in the Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID). You may switch to perpendicular
parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side
steering wheel switch to change your parking space
setting.
NOTE:
•When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
•The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
•The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
•When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
•The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
Active ParkSense Searching
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
When the driver places the gear selector into the RE-
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
wait for steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
•When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
•The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
•The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
•If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take full control of the vehicle.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward Check Surroundings — STOP
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the RE-
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to
PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position⬙message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is en-
abled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Perpendicular Park” message will show in the DID
display. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to paral-
lel parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK
for Parallel Park” message will appear in the DID display.
Active ParkSense Searching Display
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
NOTE:
•When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
•The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
•The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
•When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
•The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
parking sequence.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
When the driver places the gear selector into the RE-
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
wait for steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
•When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
•The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
•The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
•If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward Check Surroundings — STOP
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the RE-
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
wait for steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be in-
structed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
•The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Fail-
ure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). It
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
uses a forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the DID to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking
is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be pro-
vided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the LaneSense
button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A “Lane
Sense On” message is shown in the DID.
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
LaneSense Button
Lane Sense On Message
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 DID Screen
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
•When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
•When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
•
When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
•When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
•For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
•When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
•For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through
the Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
•When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
•Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
•The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control,
forward collision warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau-
tion note “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition
is switched to the OFF position.
A touch screen button to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in
REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shift-
ing out of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen
button personalization entry in the camera settings
menu.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
ParkView Camera Location
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
CAUTION!
•To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera System that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the surroundings and top view of your vehicle when-
ever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a different
view is selected through the ⬙on screen soft buttons⬙. The
top view of the vehicle will show which doors are open.
The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display
along with a caution note; “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note
will disappear. The Surround View Camera System is
comprised of 4 sequential cameras located in the front
grille, rear liftgate and side mirrors.
NOTE: The Surround View Camera System has pro-
grammable settings that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the rear
camera view & top view is the default view of the system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition
is switched to the OFF position.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the surround view camera mode is
exited and the last known screen appears again. There is
a touch screen button (X) to disable the display of the
camera image.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including the
side view mirrors and its projected backup path based on
the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Modes of Operation
Additional camera modes can be selected when the
vehicle is in any gear and the surround view camera
system is activated by pressing the soft key located in the
“Controls” screen or the “Apps” screen in the Uconnect
system.
Top View
The Top view will show in the Uconnect System with
Rear View and Front View in a split view display. There
is integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and
rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow
to red corresponding the distance zones to the oncoming
object. NOTE:
•Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
•Due to wide angle cameras in mirror, the image will
appear distorted.
•Top view will show which sliding doors are open.
ParkSense Arcs
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
•Open Front doors will remove outside image.
Rear View
This is the Default view of the system
in REVERSE and is always paired with
the Top view of the vehicle with op-
tional active guide lines for the pro-
jected path when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the rear camera system. The Top
view will be disabled when this is
selected.
Front View
The Front view will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and
is always paired with the Top view of
the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the front camera system. The Top
view will be disabled when this is
selected.
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated in the following condi-
tions:
•The speed of the vehicle reaches greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h).
•The vehicle is out of REVERSE for greater than 10
seconds.
•Shift the vehicle into PARK from a different gear.
•Press the “X” button if the vehicle is in any gear.
NOTE:
•If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lenses.
•If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see
your nearest authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
•To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in
your drive path.
•To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using Surround View.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Surround View Camera. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe
seals the system.
WARNING!
•Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
•Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
•A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
•Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
(Continued)
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermar-
ket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
•A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
•To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
1. Put the vehicle in park and switch the ignition off.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
(3 o’clock position) and release to open. 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Fuel Filler Cap Release
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
5. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel
filler nozzle.
6. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge
(3 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and then
release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
•In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the
ice build up.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
•An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
•Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
Trailer Tow
Package
GCWR (Gross
Combined
Weight Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer
Weight)
Max. Tongue
Weight
3.6L/Automatic Yes 8,600 lbs
(3 900 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
3,600 lbs
(1 632 kg)*
360 lbs (163 kg)
No 6,500 lbs
(2 948 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)*
149 lbs (67 kg)
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg).
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in
“Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle” for further
information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Vehicle Loading Chart
Follow these steps to determine the total weight the
vehicle can carry.
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your vehicle.
•Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of vehicle
full fluids NO Occupants).
2. Determine occupant count.
•For calculation purposes, average weight of an occu-
pant is 150 lb (68 kg).
EXAMPLE:
•GVWR = 6005 lbs (2723 kg)
•CURB = 4500 lbs (2041 kg)
•Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6005 lbs (2723 kg)
- 4500 lbs (2041 kg) = 1505 lbs (682 kg)
4 Occupants (at 150 lbs [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
•1505 lbs (682 kg) – 600 lbs (272 kg) (4 x 150 lbs [68 kg])
– 360 lbs (163 kg) (10% of 3600 lbs [1632 kg]) = 545 lbs
(247 kg) of cargo in vehicle
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No
Trailer
Tongue Load,
Max Trailer
Max Cargo
With Max
Trailer 360 lb
(136 kg) Tongue
Load
2 People / 300 lbs (136) kg 1205 lbs (546 kg)
1205 lbs
(546 kg) –
360 lbs (136 kg)
= 845 lbs
(383 kg)
845 lbs (383 kg)
4 people / 600 lbs (272 kg) 955 lbs (433 kg)
955 lbs (433 kg)
– 360 lbs
(136 kg) =
545 lbs (247 kg) 545 lbs (247 kg)
7 people / 1050 lbs (476 kg) 455 lbs (206 kg)
455 lbs (206 kg)
– 360 lbs
(163 kg) =
95 lbs (43 kg) 95 lbs (43 kg)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
•Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or
rear axles.
•GAWR are found on sticker in Drier Side Door Jam.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•The tongue weight of the trailer.
•The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
•Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
•Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servic-
ing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Maintaining
And Caring For Your Vehicle” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
•Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
•When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
WARNING! (Continued)
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
•Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖthe trailer wheels.
•GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
•Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
•Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle”
for proper tire inflation procedures.
•Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Maintain-
ing And Caring For Your Vehicle” for the proper
inspection procedure.
•When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Maintaining
And Caring For Your Vehicle” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
•Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
WARNING!
•Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
•Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shift-
ing when towing. For increased engine braking on steep
downhill grades, select the LOW range.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
•Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
•Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground All Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
•You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
•When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
•If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial
towing service, please refer to “Towing A Disabled
Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency”.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
Recreational Towing — All Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer
(all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly,
follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the engine OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
•DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-
ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
•Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
(Continued)
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
•Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
•Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
•Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
•Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
CAUTION! (Continued)
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
•Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........529
䡵ASSIST AND 9–1–1 REARVIEW MIRROR — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................529
䡵BULB REPLACEMENT ...................537
▫Replacement Bulbs ....................537
▫Replacing Exterior Bulbs ................539
䡵FUSES ...............................546
▫General Information....................547
▫Fuse Location ........................548
▫Underhood Fuses......................548
▫Interior Fuses ........................558
䡵JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................559
▫Jack And Spare Tire Location .............560
▫Equipment Removal ...................560
▫Preparations For Jacking ................562
▫Jacking Instructions ...................562
▫Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped .....571
▫Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire — If
Equipped ...........................574
7
▫Road Tire Installation ...................579
▫Return Inflatable Spare Tire ..............582
䡵TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........582
䡵JUMP-STARTING ......................595
▫Preparations For Jump-Start ..............596
▫Jump-Starting Procedure ................597
䡵REFUELLING IN EMERGENCY ............599
䡵IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............600
䡵MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................601
䡵FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............603
䡵TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........605
䡵ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ..............................608
䡵EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ...........609
528 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND 9–1–1 REARVIEW MIRROR — IF
EQUIPPED
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-
abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off using the Mirror Dimming Button on the
mirror.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 529
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
•Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
•The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
and you are connected to an operable 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network.
Assist And 9–1–1 Mirror
1 — 9-1-1 Button
2 — Mirror Dimming Button
3 — ASSIST Button
530 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
•Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
•Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
features.
•Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
2. The LED light located between the Power and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 531
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
•Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
•The vehicle brand.
•The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
•Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
•Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to re-
main connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
532 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
•If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
•Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal recep-
tion is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
•The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
•Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 533
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
•The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
•The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
•An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle de-
vice requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
•Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
•The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
•The ignition is in OFF position.
534 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
•The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
•The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
•The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
•1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
•Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
•Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
•1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
•Weather conditions.
•Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
•Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
•Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from plac-
ing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 535
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
536 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center & Rear Reading Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Door Courtesy Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Instrument Cluster Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Lamp(s) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 537
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp Low Beam - D3S
High Beam - 9005LL
Halogen Headlamp Reflector Low Beam - H11LL
Projector Halogen Low Beam - 9005HL+
All High Beams - 9005LL
Dedicated Daytime Running Lamp (If Equipped) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24WNA (If Halogen Headlamp Equipped)
PWY24WSV (If HID Headlamp Equipped)
Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp PWY24WNA (If Bulb Equipped)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp H11LL
LED Front Fog Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21/5WLL
538 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Lamps Bulb Number
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp Rear Tail - Body Side - W21/5WLL (If Bulb
Equipped); LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail - Liftgate - W5WLL (If Bulb Equipped); LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker: W3W
Backup Lamp W21W
License Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source
yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 539
WARNING! (Continued)
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
1. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp bulb cap.
2. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
540 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Headlamp Bulb Socket Headlamp Bulb
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 541
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
6. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp hous-
ing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn
signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into
the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp
socket clockwise to lock it in place.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
542 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front And Rear Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner
and carefully peel back liner for access.
2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise to remove it from the
lamp assembly.
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket
and replace with a new bulb.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 543
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly
and rotate 1/4 turn clockwise to lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the
three fasteners.
Front Fog Lamp — Halogen
1. Remove fasteners from inner wheel liner and carefully
peel back liner for access.
2. Reach through the front fascia to fog lamp housing to
access the bulb.
3. Rotate the front fog lamp socket counterclockwise,
and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the
front fog lamp housing. 4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
Front Fog Lamp Socket
544 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Install the front fog lamp socket assembly into the into
the front fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector
clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install
fasteners.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-Up Lamps And Tail
Lamps (If Bulb Equipped)
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry off
the bulb access cover on the lower liftgate trim.
3. Back-up lamps/tail lamp (if bulb equipped) are now
visible. Rotate socket(s) counter clockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s)
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Rear Bodyside Mounted Taillamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove two torx head screws on bodyside lamp using
a T30 screwdriver.
3. Remove lamp from vehicle body and locate bulb
socket on rear of lamp. Rotate socket counter-
clockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 545
6. Reverse process to reinstall the lamp onto vehicle.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LED. See your authorized
dealer for replacement.
FUSES
WARNING!
•When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
•Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
•If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
•If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
546 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work you must check the
electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
Also please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 547
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into four controllers located in the
engine compartment and under the instrument panel.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit breakers and
relays. A label that identifies each component is printed
on the inside of the cover.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F06 – – Not Used
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector
F08 – – Not Used
F09 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier/ANC
Power Distribution Center
548 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F10 – – Not Used
F11 – – Not Used
F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
F13 – – Not Used
F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F15 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior
Lights #1)
F19 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seats
Solenoid LT
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seat
Solenoid RT
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 549
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F22 – – Not Used
F23 – – Not used
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
F25B – 10 Amp Red LT RR Door/RT RR Re-
lease Module/Active Grill
Shutter/Power Mirror
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Mo-
tor
F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module
F28 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port/ USB
Port/ AUX Port/ Video
USB Port
F29 – – Not Used
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Media Hub 1, 2/ Power
Lumbar
F31 – – Not Used
550 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Node
F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Control Module
F36 – – Not Used
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior
Lighting #2)
F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner
F39 25 Amp Clear – HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Used
F41 – – Not Used
F42 30 Amp Pink – Folding Seat Module
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC Feed #1 (Interior
Lights)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 551
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F48 – – Not Used
F49 25 Amp Clear – RR Sliding Door Module
F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F53 – – Not Used
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves
F55 – 15 Amp Blue Keyless Ignition System/
DVD/Voice Recognition
Module
552 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F56 – 10 Amp Red Front and Rear HVAC
Control Module/ESP/
ESC
F57 – – Not Used
F58 – – Not Used
F59 30 Amp Pink – 7 Way Connector Recep-
tacle — If Equipped
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo APO
F61 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Stop/
Turn — If Equipped
F62 – – Not Used
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Stop/
Turn — If Equipped
F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp
F65 – – Not Used
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 553
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F66 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC)
F67 – 10 Amp Red In Vehicle Temperature
Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Drivers Assist System
Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If
Equipped
F68 – – Not Used
F69 – – Not Used
F70 – – Not Used
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors – If
Equipped
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup
554 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR
ISC
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect/DCSD/
Telematics
F77 – 10 Amp Red RR Entertainment Screen
1 And 2/ Media Screen 1
And 2/ 3rd Row Row
USB Charge Only/ 2nd
Row YSB Charge Only/
Sunroof/Rainsensor/
CRVMM/
F78 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster/E-
Shifter
F79 – 10 Amp Red ICS/Front And Rear
HVAC/ SCCM/ EPB
F80 – – Not Used
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 555
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
F83 20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights — If
Equipped
F84 40 Amp Green – ESP Motor Pump
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F86 – – Not Used
F87 – – Not Used
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats
F90 – – Not Used
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Ventilated Seats/
Heated Steering Wheel
F92 – – Not Used
F93 – – Not Used
556 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F94 – – Not Used
F95 – 10 Amp Red USB Charge Only Port
F96 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) (Airbag)
F97 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) (Airbag)
F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp
F99 30 Amp Pink – Electrical Brake Module/
Trailer Tow — If
Equipped
F100 – 10 Amp Red AHLM/Rear Camera/
LBSS/RBSS/CVPM/
Humidity Sensor/In Ve-
hicle Temperature Sensor
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 557
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument
panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F13 15 Amp Blue Low Beam Left
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module / Siren
F37 7.5 Amp Brown Aux. Switch Bank Module (ASBM)
F38 20 Amp Yellow All Doors Lock/Unlock
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
F48 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F51 10 Amp Red Driver Window Switch / Power Mirrors – If
Equipped
F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F89 5 Amp Tan Trunk Lamp
558 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F91 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Left
F92 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Right
F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
•Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 559
Jack And Spare Tire Location
The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air compressor
(if equipped) or tire service kit (if equipped)are stowed
behind a access panel on left hand side of the vehicle.
Equipment Removal
1. Remove the access panel to the jacking equipment.
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire Service
Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut that is holding
the Inflatable Spare Tire and gently remove it from the
storage area. Remove wrench from foam tray.
Jacking Equipment Location
560 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw counterclock-
wise to collapse from storage area that is located
behind the tire.
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Tire Service Kit
3 — Wrench
4 — Fuel Filler Funnel
Jack Location
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 561
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if chang-
ing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
(Continued)
562 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
•Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•Set the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
•Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
•Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire” section of “Tires” in
“Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle” for informa-
tion about the inflatable spare tire, its use, and operation.
Jack Warning Label
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 563
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill
flange of the vehicle body.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
Extending The Wrench Jack Locations
564 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Jack Location Front Jack Engaged
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 565
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
(Continued)
Rear Jacking Location Rear Jack Engaged
566 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the compact spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the inflatable spare on the car, located in the
rear cargo area of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 567
CAUTION! (Continued)
damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable
spare tire.
7. Leave the car on the jack and start inflating the
inflatable spare after the tire has been mounted to the
car. Secure the wheel to the hub by tightening the nuts
with wrench. After inflation, once the vehicle is low-
ered you will have a second opportunity to “torque”
the lug nuts.
8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure 60 psi
(4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air Compressor or Tire
Service Kit if equipped. Refer to “Portable Air Com-
pressor” in this section for usage procedure if
Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire
568 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
equipped. Refer to “Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire”
in this section for usage procedure if equipped
9. Lower the car once the inflatable Spare has reached its
pressure and the compressor-hose has been removed
from the tire valve.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in the “Technical Data” section for
proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 569
12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray cover
assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the inflatable spare tire location.
Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon
as possible.
13. Stow the jack back in the stowage compartment and
place the access panel back. The stud of the storage
are must be threaded through the lower part of the
jack. Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to secure it
in place.
NOTE: Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo
area.
Storing The Jack
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud
570 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air
Compressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor located in
the side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the
inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).
Portable Air Compressor
1 — Power Plug
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Air Hose
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 571
Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable Spare
Tire
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the storage
location.
2. Raise the vehicle as described in the
Jacking Instructions within this sec-
tion.
3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as
described in the Jack Instructions
section in this manual. Make sure
that the valve stem is located near
the ground, and then screw the air
hose of the Portable Air compressor
to the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and connect
it the vehicles 12 Volt power Outlet.
572 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Always start the engine before
turning ON the Portable Air Com-
pressor.
6. Switch the power button ON.
7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
recommended as per the label on
the wheel or if the vehicle equipped
with the inflatable spare tire pres-
sure indicated on the Tire and
Loading information label located
on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE: If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation button
to reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the recom-
mended pressure, lower the vehicle
with the jack as described in the
Jack Instructions section in this
manual.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 573
9. Remove the speed limit label
sticker from the Portable Air Com-
pressor and place it on the center of
the steering wheel.
10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the foam tray
and secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the
cargo area.
WARNING!
•Do not lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor by
the hose.
•Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only in
the provided place.
•The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
•Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from open
flames or heat source.
Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit.
Use the Tire Service Kit located in the side compartment
of the cargo area to inflate the inflatable tire to 60 psi
(4.2 Bar).
574 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air mode op-
eration only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
tire.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Power Plug
6 — Power Switch
7 — Deflation Button
8 — Pressure Gauge
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 575
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce
the air pressure in the tire if it becomes
over-inflated.
WARNING!
•Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
•A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
•Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
576 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
•Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Ensure the park brake is engaged.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the storage location.
2. Uncoil the Sealant/Air Hose. Re-
move the cap from the valve stem
and then screw the fitting in at the
end of the Sealant/Air Hose clock-
wise onto the valve stem.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 577
3. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
power outlet.
4. Place the Tire Service Kit on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
5. Engage parking brake before turning the engine ON.
6. Always start the engine before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
7. Turn the Mode Select Knob to Air
Mode position.
NOTE: Do not fill inflatable spare tire with sealant. Refer
to “Tire Service Kit” in this chapter for repairing tires.
8. Switch the power button ON.
578 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
recommended as per the label on
the wheel or if the vehicle equipped
with the inflatable spare tire pres-
sure indicated on the Tire and
Loading information label located
on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE: If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation button
to reduce the tire air pressure.
10. After the tire reaches the recom-
mended pressure, lower the ve-
hicle with the jack as described in
the Jack Instructions section in this
manual.
11. Remove the speed limit label
sticker from the Tire Service Kit
and place it on the center of the
steering wheel.
12. Return the Tire Service Kit to the foam tray and
secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the
cargo area.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 579
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
580 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in the “Technical Data” section for
proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in the “Technical Data” section for
proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 581
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Return Inflatable Spare Tire
To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage location.
1. Return the Jack.
2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Inflator Kit or
Portable Air Compressor and push the deflation but-
ton to do this step. Refer to “Tire Inflator Kit” or
“Portable Air Compressor” if equipped in this section
for additional information. The inflatable spare tire
will return to its original shape.
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its original
stowage location and position facing outward.
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel installed.
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.
6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air Compressor
if equipped and tighten the strap.
7. Install access panel door.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit.
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a tem-
porary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph
(90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is stored
in the storage bin located behind the rear cargo trim
panel.
582 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Power Plug
6 — Power Switch
7 — Deflation Button
8 — Pressure Gauge
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 583
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air pump
operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce
the air pressure in the tire if it becomes
over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
•Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner
584 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the
system. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this
section.
•The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
need to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original equip-
ment vehicle dealer.
•When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
•For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
•You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
•Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
•Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 585
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
•Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
•A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
•Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
•Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
(Continued)
586 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary
to place the valve stem in this position before proceed-
ing.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 587
3. Remove the cap from the valve
stem and then screw the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the engine before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to
the Sealant Mode position.
588 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. After pushing the Power Button,
the sealant (white fluid) will flow
from the Sealant Bottle through the
Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the
Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position and
not Air Mode. Push the Power Button to turn On the
Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning ON
the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
Call for assistance.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 589
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until
sealant is no longer flowing
through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pres-
sure Gauge can read as high as 70
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge
will decrease quickly from approxi-
mately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual
tire pressure when the Sealant
Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into
the tire immediately after the Seal-
ant Bottle is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the
tire to the cold tire inflation pres-
sure found on the tire and loading
information label located in the
driver-side door opening. Check
the tire pressure by looking at the
Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
•The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
590 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn off
the Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the speed limit label from
the Tire Service Kit and place
sticker on the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Proceed to “Drive Vehicle.”
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 591
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant
and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit
Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as pos-
sible at an Authorized Dealer.
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section before continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve
stem and then screw the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
valve stem.
592 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Uncoil the power plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fit-
ting at the end of hose onto the
valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and
turn to the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 593
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on
Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire
to the cold tire inflation pressure
found on the tire and loading infor-
mation label located in the driver-
side door opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
3. Remove the bottle cover.
594 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
NOTE:
•For sealant bottle installation follow these steps re-
verse order.
•Replacement sealant bottles are available at authorized
service centers.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 595
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
Positive Remote Battery Post
Negative Remote Battery Post
596 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
•Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
•Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 597
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4.
Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the negative post near the windshield cowl
(exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine).
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
598 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
REFUELLING IN EMERGENCY
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located with
the spare tire (if equipped) or in the upper storage bin. If
your vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is
needed, insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed
to fill the vehicle.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 599
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer
to “Refuelling The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating ”
in this manual.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•On the highways — slow down.
•In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
600 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your
foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain
control of the vehicle before activating the Manual
Park Release. If possible, you should apply the
parking brake. Activating the Manual Park Release
will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
secured or properly connected to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured
vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those
in or around the vehicle.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 601
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated in
the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is to the
lower left of the steering column.
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is connected to
a red tether strap. Pull the tether strap out as far as it
will go, then release it. The transmission should now
be in NEUTRAL, allowing the vehicle to be moved.
NOTE: When the lever is locked in the released position,
the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and the
access cover cannot be re-installed.
5. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
602 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
2. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its
original position.
3. Verify that the transmission is in PARK.
4. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and re-
install the access cover. If the access cover cannot be
re-installed, repeat steps 1 through 3.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Safety” for further information. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙switch again to
restore ⬙ESC On⬙mode.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 603
CAUTION!
•Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
•When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
•Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
604 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
•You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are
on the ground), to avoid inadvertent Electric Park
Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer programmable
features in the Uconnect Settings.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 605
•Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the electric parking brake (EPB) is en-
gaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear
wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a
flatbed.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points
that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on
the underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
•Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly
seated and secured in the attachment points.
•This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained
professional only.
606 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
•Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled
vehicle from its environment.
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
•Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
•Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
•Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
•Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
•Be applied at constant speed.
•Be applied parallel to the center line of the length
of the vehicle.
•Not be an abrupt acceleration.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
Front Recovery Points
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 607
NOTE: The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake
pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the
ignition in the ON/RUN position, you must manually
disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver’s
door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then
pushing the EPB switch down.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
in order to move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
•Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
in this guide for further information on the Enhanced
Accident Response System (EARS) function.
608 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
in this guide for further information on the Event Data
Recorder (EDR).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 609
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵SCHEDULE SERVICING .................613
▫Maintenance Plan .....................615
▫Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ...........617
䡵ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........618
▫Checking Oil Level ....................619
▫Adding Washer Fluid ..................619
▫Maintenance-Free Battery ...............620
䡵DEALER SERVICE ......................621
▫Engine Oil ..........................622
▫Engine Oil Filter ......................624
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................625
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance .............625
▫Body Lubrication .....................627
▫Windshield Wiper Blades ...............627
▫Exhaust System ......................628
▫Cooling System ......................630
▫Brake System ........................636
▫Automatic Transmission ................637
䡵RAISING THE VEHICLE .................639
䡵TIRES ...............................639
8
▫Tire Safety Information .................639
▫Tires — General Information .............649
▫Tire Types ...........................657
▫Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............659
▫Tire Chains (Traction Devices) ............661
▫Tire Rotation Recommendations ...........663
䡵DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................664
▫Treadwear...........................664
▫Traction Grades .......................664
▫Temperature Grades....................665
䡵STORING THE VEHICLE .................665
䡵BODYWORK ..........................667
▫Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......667
▫Body And Underbody Maintenance.........668
▫Preserving The Bodywork ...............669
䡵INTERIORS ..........................670
▫Seats And Fabric Parts ..................670
▫Plastic And Coated Parts ................671
▫Leather Parts.........................672
▫Glass Surfaces .......................672
612 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
SCHEDULE SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operat-
ing Conditions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to “Vehicle Info” in “Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•Check engine oil level.
•Check windshield washer fluid level.
•Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 613
•Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
•Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
•Change oil and filter
•Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
•Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
•Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
•Inspect exhaust system
•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
614 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance Plan
Mileage:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary. XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
pulley, and replace if necessary X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 615
Mileage:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace spark plugs ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first. XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
616 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
•Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 617
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Window Washer Fill
4 — Engine Air Cleaner
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
618 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
Windshield Washer Fluid Cap
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 619
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
•Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
•Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
(Continued)
620 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 621
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for
further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
622 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-
20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 en-
gine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity
MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 623
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
624 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Sever Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 625
WARNING!
•Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information
•The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling - R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed
by authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equip-
ment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
626 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 627
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CAUTION!
•The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
628 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further
information.
•A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 629
•Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
630 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for
further information.
CAUTION!
•Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
•Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 631
CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
•This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
•Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated.
•Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
632 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
•Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
•Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 633
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
634 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
•If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
•Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
•Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 635
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for
further information.
636 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech-
nical Data” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its performance.
The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
•To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 637
fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the trans-
mission fluid at the correct level using the recommended
fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech-
nical Data” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
638 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
a your authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures and Tire
Loading.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 639
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
640 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
•LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
•High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 641
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
642 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 643
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
644 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard 8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 645
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
646 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
•If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 647
648 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
•Safety and Vehicle Stability
•Economy
•Tread Wear
•Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
•Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
•Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 649
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
•Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
650 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
At least once a month:
•Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
•Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 651
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
652 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
•The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 653
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
654 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•Driving style.
•Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
•Distance driven.
•Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 655
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
•Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You could
(Continued)
656 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
lose control and have a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
•Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
•Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 657
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
658 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 659
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
660 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage:
•Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
•Install on front tires only.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 661
•For a 235/65R17 or 235/60R18 tire, use of a snow
traction device with a maximum projection of 9 mm
beyond the tire profile is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
•Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
•Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
•Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
•Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
•Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
•Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
662 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper main-
tenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 663
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
664 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passen-
ger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
•Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location the windows open slightly.
•Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
•Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged.
During storage check battery charge quarterly.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 665
•If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical
system, check the battery charge every thirty days.
•Clean and protect the painted parts by applying pro-
tective waxes.
•Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying
protective waxes.
•Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper
blades and leave raised from the glass.
•Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking
care not to damage the painted surface by dragging
across dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which
will not allow the evaporation of moisture present on
the surface of the vehicle.
•Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)
higher than recommended on the tire placard and
check it periodically.
•Do not drain the engine cooling system.
•Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two
weeks or more, run idle the engine for approximately
five minutes, with the air conditioning system on and
high fan speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication of
the system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage
to the compressor when the vehicle is put back into
operation.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Proce-
dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
666 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative termi-
nals to the battery, wait at least a minute with
ignition switch in the OFF position and close the
drivers door. When reconnecting the positive and
negative terminals to the battery be sure the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the drivers door is
closed.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•Stone and gravel impact.
•Insects, tree sap and tar.
•Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 667
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
•All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
•To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov-
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
668 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
•Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
•Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
•Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
•If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 669
•If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
•If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
670 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
8
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 671
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
672 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
TECHNICAL DATA
CONTENTS
䡵IDENTIFICATION DATA .................675
▫Vehicle Identification Number ............675
䡵WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................676
▫Torque Specifications ..................676
䡵FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................677
▫Reformulated Gasoline .................678
▫Materials Added To Fuel ................678
▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............679
▫CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .....679
▫MMT In Gasoline .....................680
▫Fuel System Cautions...................680
▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............681
䡵FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED ...........682
▫E-85 General Information ...............682
▫Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................682
▫Fuel Requirements ....................683
▫Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .............684
▫Starting ............................684
9
▫Cruising Range .......................684
▫Replacement Parts ....................685
▫Maintenance ........................685
䡵FLUID CAPACITIES ....................686
䡵FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...............687
▫Engine .............................687
▫Chassis ............................689
674 TECHNICAL DATA
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped under the right front seat
and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure
Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Vehicle Identification Number
9
TECHNICAL DATA 675
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Wheel Mounting Surface
676 TECHNICAL DATA
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide opti-
mum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded “Regu-
lar” gasoline having a posted octane num-
ber of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it
will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
Torque Patterns
9
TECHNICAL DATA 677
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of Top Tier
678 TECHNICAL DATA
Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptier-
gas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-
pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
9
TECHNICAL DATA 679
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
tem.
•An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
680 TECHNICAL DATA
CAUTION! (Continued)
•The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
9
TECHNICAL DATA 681
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please
refer to the other sections of this manual for information
on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.
WARNING!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
682 TECHNICAL DATA
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
•Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
•Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE:
•Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
•Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron
may be used.
9
TECHNICAL DATA 683
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended
that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used.
MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed
during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional pro-
tection to FCA US LLC engines.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approxi-
mately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
684 TECHNICAL DATA
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
9
TECHNICAL DATA 685
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engines 19 Gallons 71 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20 , API
Certified)
5 quarts 4.7 liters
Cooling System*
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
13.1 Quarts — Standard Duty
Cooling
13.4 Quarts — Heavy Duty Cool-
ing
12.4 Liters — Standard Duty Cool-
ing
12.7 Liters — Heavy Duty Cooling
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
686 TECHNICAL DATA
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E85) Engine – If
Equipped
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
9
TECHNICAL DATA 687
CAUTION!
•Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
•This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
688 TECHNICAL DATA
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only
recommended brake fluids.
Refrigerant Use only refrigerant R-1234yf
Charge Amounts:
Single A/C System — 880g (1.94 lb)
Dual A/C System — 1050g (2.31 lb)
Compressor Oil Use only PAG oil PSD-1:
Single A/C System — 140 ml
Dual A/C System — 190 ml
9
TECHNICAL DATA 689
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵UCONNECT RADIOS ...................694
䡵PERSONALIZED MENU BAR ..............694
䡵CYBERSECURITY.......................695
䡵UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................696
▫Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0
Settings ............................697
▫Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4
Settings.............................718
䡵STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......742
▫Radio Operation ......................743
䡵AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ...............743
䡵UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED .....745
▫Getting Started .......................746
▫Accessing The System From The Uconnect
Radio ..............................747
▫Uconnect Theater Controls ...............748
▫Accessing The System From The Uconnect Theater
Rear Screens .........................749
▫Pairing The Remote ....................750
▫Unpairing The Remote ..................751
10
▫Media Sources........................752
▫Uconnect Theater Remote Control ..........753
▫Uconnect Theater Home Screen And
Controls ............................755
▫Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From
Uconnect Radio .......................756
▫Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions . . . .759
▫Uconnect Theater Apps .................760
▫Using The Rear Video USB Port ...........763
▫Play Video Games .....................764
▫Headphones Operation .................765
▫Disc Menu ..........................768
▫Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed . . .769
▫Rear Climate Controls ..................769
▫General Information....................770
䡵RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .770
▫Regulatory And Safety Information .........770
䡵UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS ................................772
▫Introducing Uconnect...................772
▫Get Started ..........................773
▫Basic Voice Commands..................775
▫Radio ..............................776
▫Media..............................778
▫Phone..............................779
▫Voice Text Reply ......................781
▫Climate.............................783
692 MULTIMEDIA
▫Navigation ..........................784
▫Uconnect Access ......................785
▫Register ............................786
▫Vehicle Health Alert ...................786
▫Mobile App..........................786
▫Voice Texting.........................788
▫Yelp ..............................790
▫SiriusXM Travel Link ...................791
▫Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped .............792
▫Do Not Disturb .......................792
▫General Information....................794
▫Additional Information .................794
䡵CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........795
10
MULTIMEDIA 693
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
Personalized Menu Bar
694 MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
software updates to improve the usability and perfor-
mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys-
tems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
•It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
•ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
(Continued)
10
MULTIMEDIA 695
WARNING! (Continued)
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
•As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
•FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
•To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
•Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
•Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Prac-
tices - If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in “Multi-
media” in your Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Own-
er’s Manual on the DVD.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and/or buttons on the faceplate located
on the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect touchscreen.
696 MULTIMEDIA
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the
Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In
addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and
back arrow buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out
of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0 Settings
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
10
MULTIMEDIA 697
Push the MORE
button on the faceplate, then press
the “Settings ” button on the touchscreen to display
the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available pro-
grammable features.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the “ON/RUN” position.
KeySense
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique
4-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when ac-
cessing the specific settings for the first time. This 4-digit
PIN can only be rest by an authorized dealer.
After pressing the “KeySense” button on the touchscreen,
and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings
will be available:
•Forward Collision Warning
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Near, Medium,
or Far.
•Forward Collision Sensitivity
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system will warn
you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The feature can be set to Near, Medium, or Far.
698 MULTIMEDIA
•Forward Collision Warning Active Braking
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). The
system can be enabled or disabled by pressing “Forward
Collision Warning Active Braking” button on the touch-
screen.
•ParkSense — If Equipped
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph
(11 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
or Sound and Display.
•Front ParkSense Volume
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The KeySense default volume setting is ME-
DIUM. To make your selection, press the “Front
ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
has been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
•Rear ParkSense Volume
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The KeySense default volume setting is ME-
DIUM. To make your selection, press the “Rear
ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
10
MULTIMEDIA 699
•Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
When this feature is selected, the ParkSense system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only en-
abled when ParkSense is also on). The system can be
enabled or disabled by pressing the “Rear ParkSense
Braking Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected.
•Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. The KeySense default is “Light & Chime”.
Press the “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the
touchscreen to change the Blind Spot Alert status.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
•Maximum Vehicle Speed
To set the maximum vehicle speed, press the “+” or “-”
button to select from 65/70/75/80/85 MPH (90/95/100/
105/110 km/h).
700 MULTIMEDIA
•SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
•Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To
make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button
on the touchscreen, select the channels you would
like to skip.
•Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information
on the Subscription Information screen to re-
subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available.
•Display Mode
When in this display you may select the “Auto” or
“Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press
and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the
touchscreen.
10
MULTIMEDIA 701
•Brightness
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights on or off. Adjust the
brightness with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the
touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale be-
tween the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
•Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Español/Français) for all display no-
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-
tion system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button
on the touchscreen, then press the desired language
button on the touchscreen.
•Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press
the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID). The following select-
able units of measure are listed below:
•Custom
•Speed
Select from: “mph” or “kph.”
•Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
•Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km”
or “km/L.”
702 MULTIMEDIA
•Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
•Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
•Set Time and Format
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time and Format” button then
choose from a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the
corresponding arrow above and below the current time
to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”
•Show Time Status — If Equipped
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time Status” button on the
touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.”
•Sync Time — If Equipped
When in this display, you may sync the time with GPS.
Press the “Sync Time” button on the touchscreen and
select from “ON” or “OFF.”
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
•ParkView Backup Camera — If Equipped
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
10
MULTIMEDIA 703
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
•ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped
Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay” button
on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or
OFF.
•ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines — If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid
lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
back up path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
•Forward Collision Warning On/Off — If Equipped
The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you. The forward collision button is located in
the Uconnect display in the controls settings. To turn the
FCW system OFF, push the forward collision button once
to turn the system OFF. To turn the FCW system back
ON, push the forward collision button again to turn the
system ON. Changing the FCW status to “OFF” prevents
the system from warning you of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front of you.
•Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) — If
Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW+) feature can be can
be set to Far, Med or Near. The default status of FCW+ is
the Med setting. This means the system will warn you of
a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are a relatively medium distance away. This gives
you the medium reaction time. To change the setting for
a more dynamic driving experience, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
704 MULTIMEDIA
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW+ status, press and release the “Near” “Med” or
“Far” buttons.
•Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) Active
Braking — If Equipped
The FCW+ system includes Advanced Brake Assist
(ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the
brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential
forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake
pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake
pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
•ParkSense — If Equipped
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph
(11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display.
•Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be se-
lected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if
equipped). The chime volume settings include
“LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and “HIGH.” The factory de-
fault volume setting is MEDIUM.
•Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be
selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if
equipped). The chime volume settings include
“LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and “HIGH.” The factory de-
fault volume setting is MEDIUM.
•Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the park assist system
will detect objects located behind the vehicle and
utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
10
MULTIMEDIA 705
•LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late” warning
zone start point. The default setting is “Medium”.
•LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.” The
default setting is “Medium”.
•Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When
this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in
the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is
activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,”
“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
The default setting is “Lights”
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the
BSM not operating to specification.
706 MULTIMEDIA
•Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for system function and operating
information. To make your selection, press the “Hill Start
Assist” button on the touchscreen and make your selec-
tion. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
•Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
•Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the gear selector is in the REVERSE
position. The mirrors will move back to their previous
position when the transmission is shifted out of RE-
VERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Mirrors In
Reverse” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
•Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
10
MULTIMEDIA 707
setting, press the Headlights Off Delay button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. The selected button will highlight indicating
that the setting has been selected.
•Flash Lights With Sliding Door
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the sliding doors are opened or closed with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using
the passive entry feature. To make your selection, press
the “Flash Lights With Sliding Door” button on the
touchscreen, then select from “On” or “Off.”
•Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button on
the touchscreen and make your selection.
•Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “Illuminated Approach” button and choose
either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds.
•Automatic High Beam Headlamps — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, then select from “On”
or “Off.”
708 MULTIMEDIA
•Daytime Running Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
while the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
•Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “On” or
“Off.”
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
•Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
•Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-
sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
10
MULTIMEDIA 709
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is
used to unlock the door.
•Power Liftgate Alert
When this feature is selected, an alert plays when the
power liftgate is raising or lowering. To make your
selection, press the “Power Liftgate Alert” button on the
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
•Sliding Door Alert
When this feature is selected, a chime plays when the
sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed. To make
your selection, press the “Sliding Door Alert” button on
the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
•Hands Free Lift Gate
When this feature is selected, the rear liftgate can opened
or closed using a Foot Activation in a single-kick motion.
To make your selection, press the “Hands Free Lift Gate”
button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
•Hands Free Sliding Door
When this feature is selected, the sliding doors can
opened or closed using a Foot Activation in a single-kick
motion. To make your selection, press the “Hands Free
Sliding Door” button on the touchscreen and select from
“On” or “Off.”
•Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
on Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
710 MULTIMEDIA
•Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob or the Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
•Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
selection, press the “Horn w/Lock” button on the touch-
screen and select from ⬙Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press”
•Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped
Press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. When this feature is se-
lected, the horn will sound when the remote start is
activated. To make your selection, press the “Sound Horn
With Remote Start” button on the touchscreen and select
“ON” or “OFF.”
•Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
•Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will
unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Key Fob UNLOCK button, you must push the RKE
10
MULTIMEDIA 711
Key Fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen-
ger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will
unlock on the first press of the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK
button.
NOTE: If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s
door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.
Touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is
opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used
to unlock all doors (or use RKE Key Fob).
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
•Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
•Engine Off Power Delay — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
712 MULTIMEDIA
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “0 seconds,” “45
seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the
touchscreen.
•Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval.
•Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit
Seat” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the
compass variance zone should be set for best results.
•Compass Variance
Press “Compass Variance” on the touchscreen to change
this setting. You will then be able to select a compass
variance of 1 through 15 per the compass variance zone
map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map.
10
MULTIMEDIA 713
Once properly set, the compass will automatically com-
pensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide
the most accurate compass headings.
•Compass Calibration
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter
calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“YES” button on the touchscreen and complete one or
more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects). A message will appear on the touch-
screen when the compass has been successfully cali-
brated.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view
mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar De-
tectors. This is where the compass module is located, and
it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it
may give false readings.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
•Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
Compass Variance Zone Map
714 MULTIMEDIA
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
•Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
•Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
•Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.
•Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
•AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.
10
MULTIMEDIA 715
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
•Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
•Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
•Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
716 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
•Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to
their default settings. To restore the settings to their
default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button. A
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to
reset your settings to default?” select “OK” to restore,
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating
⬙Settings reset to default.⬙
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
•Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to clear,
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating
⬙Personal data cleared”.
10
MULTIMEDIA 717
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4 Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings
” button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access all of the available programmable
features.
NOTE:
•Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
•Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option”
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Once the setting is com-
plete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X”
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
Uconnect 8.4 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
718 MULTIMEDIA
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
KeySense
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique
4-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when ac-
cessing the specific settings for the first time. This 4-digit
PIN can only be rest by an authorized dealer.
After pressing the “KeySense” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
•Forward Collision Warning
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be set to Near, Medium, or Far.
•Forward Collision Sensitivity
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) This means the
system will warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you. The feature can be set to Near,
Medium, or Far.
•Forward Collision Warning Active Braking
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). The
system can be enabled or disabled by pressing “Forward
Collision Warning Active Braking” button on the touch-
screen.
10
MULTIMEDIA 719
•ParkSense — If Equipped
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph
(11 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense status,
press and release the checkbox for “Sound” or “Sound
and Display.”
•Front ParkSense Volume
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The KeySense default volume setting is ME-
DIUM. To make your selection, press the “Front
ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
has been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
•Rear ParkSense Volume
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The KeySense default volume setting is ME-
DIUM. To make your selection, press the “Rear
ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
•Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
When this feature is selected, the ParkSense system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only en-
abled when ParkSense is also on). The system can be
enabled or disabled by pressing the “Rear ParkSense
Braking Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected.
720 MULTIMEDIA
•Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press
the “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the touch-
screen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
•Maximum Vehicle Speed
To set the maximum vehicle speed, press the “+” or “-”
button to select from 65/70/75/80/85 MPH (90/95/100/
105/110 km/h).
•SiriusXM Setup
•Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To
make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button
on the touchscreen, select the channels you would
like to skip.
10
MULTIMEDIA 721
•Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information
on the Subscription Information screen to re-
subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
•Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the display
mode settings. To change Mode status, press and release
the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen.
•Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights ON⬙setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙or
⬙parade⬙positions.
722 MULTIMEDIA
•Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙or
⬙parade⬙positions.
•Set Theme
When in this display, you may select the theme for the
display screen. To make your selection, press the ⬙Set
Theme⬙button on the touchscreen, then select the desired
theme option button until a check-mark appears showing
that the setting has been selected.
•Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-
gation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lan-
guage button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has
been selected.
•Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected.
•Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the “Control Screen
10
MULTIMEDIA 723
Time-Out” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
•Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) as
the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a pro-
grammed route. To make your selection, press the “Navi-
gation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
•Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
•Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
•Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
•Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
•Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
724 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
•Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
•Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
mand List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
•Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
•Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
10
MULTIMEDIA 725
•Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down.
•Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
•Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
•Forward Collision On/Off — If Equipped
The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you. The forward collision button is located in
the Uconnect display in the controls settings. To turn the
FCW system OFF, push the forward collision button once
to turn the system OFF. To turn the FCW system back
ON, push the forward collision button again to turn the
system ON. Changing the FCW status to “OFF” prevents
the system from warning you of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
726 MULTIMEDIA
•Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, Med or
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
button.
•Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
Active Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected.
•LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late” warning
zone start point.
•LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
10
MULTIMEDIA 727
•ParkSense — If Equipped
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re-
lease the “Sound Only” or “Sound and Display” button.
•Front ParkSense Volume
The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume
settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selec-
tion, press the “Front ParkSense Vol.” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense
will retain its last known configuration state through
ignition cycles.
•Rear ParkSense Volume
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be se-
lected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume
settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selec-
tion, press the “Rear ParkSense Vol.” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense
will retain its last known configuration state through
ignition cycles.
•Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
728 MULTIMEDIA
•Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors in Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
•Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
•ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
10
MULTIMEDIA 729
display along with a caution note to “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected.
•ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the previously viewed screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
“Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touch-
screen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
•Surround View Camera
Displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle’s
exterior environment while backing up. When this fea-
ture is selected, the Surround View Camera can be
enabled or disabled. To make your selection, press the
“Surround View Camera” button on the touchscreen,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that
the setting had been selected.
•Surround View Camera Delay
When activation occurs by pressing a button in the
“Controls” screen, the initial view will be the default
view (associated with current gear state). Image will be
displayed while in that gear as long as vehicle speed
730 MULTIMEDIA
remains less than 8 mph (12 km/h). When vehicle is
shifted into a different gear (other than ‘REVERSE’), the
image will remain displayed for 10 seconds or until
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), at which point it
will immediately cancel and return to the last viewed
screen.
•Surround View Camera Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you
to see active guidelines over the Surround View camera
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE
or the Surround View button on the touchscreen is
pushed. The image will be displayed on the radio touch-
screen display. To make your selection, press the “Sur-
round View Camera Active Guidelines” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected.
•Sliding Door Alert
When this feature is selected, a chime plays when the
sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed. To make
your selection, press the “Sliding Door Alert” button on
the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
•Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the
system will automatically activate the windshield wipers
if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your
selection, press the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 731
•Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. To make your selection, press the “Hill
Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected.
•Brake Service
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys-
tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,
rotors, etc.).
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
•Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0, 30, 60 or
90 seconds.
•Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval.
732 MULTIMEDIA
•Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” but-
ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
•Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
•Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, show-
ing that the setting has been selected.
•Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that the setting has been se-
lected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 733
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
•Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock when the
vehicle is in motion. To make your selection, press the
“Auto Door Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected.
•Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
•Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob, or when using the passive
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or
without the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that the setting has been se-
lected.
•Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated with the RKE. To make your
selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd
Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
734 MULTIMEDIA
•Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
•1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When ⬙Driver Door⬙is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob UN-
LOCK button. You must press the RKE Key Fob UN-
LOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will result in only
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE Key Fob).
•Passive Entry — If Equipped
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Key Fob LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
10
MULTIMEDIA 735
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
•Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-
sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob is set to
ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is
used to unlock the door.
•Power Liftgate Alert
When this feature is selected, an alert plays when the
power liftgate is raising or lowering. To make your
selection, press the “Power Liftgate Alert” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
•Hands Free Power Liftgate
When this feature is selected, hands free technology
automatically opens or closes the power liftgate. To make
your selection, press the “Hands Free Power Liftgate”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
736 MULTIMEDIA
•Sliding Door Alert
When this feature is selected, a chime plays when the
sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed. To make
your selection, press the “Sliding Door Alert” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
•Flash Lights With Sliding Door
When this feature is selected, the headlights flash when
the sliding door is opening. To make your selection, press
the “Flash Lights With Sliding Door” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
•Hands Free Power Sliding Door
When this feature is selected, hands free technology
automatically opens or closes the power sliding door. To
make your selection, press the “Hands Free Power Slid-
ing Door” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
•Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 737
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
•Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
•Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
minutes” or “10 minutes.”
•Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
•Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
738 MULTIMEDIA
•Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
•Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
•Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
•AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
•Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 739
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
•Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the “Uconnect Manual Supplement.”
•Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the “Uconnect Manual Supplement.”
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
•Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
•Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
740 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
•Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to
their default settings. To restore the settings to their
default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button. A
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to
reset your settings to default?” select “OK” to restore,
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating
⬙Settings reset to default.⬙
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
•Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to clear,
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating
⬙Personal data cleared”.
10
MULTIMEDIA 741
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available:
•System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
742 MULTIMEDIA
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
There are numerous USB ports located throughout the
vehicle. This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Supple-
ment Manual.
10
MULTIMEDIA 743
There are multiple USB “charge only” ports in this
vehicle.
•In the center console
•On the back of the front row seats in the Uconnect
Theater Media hubs
•Above the rear cup holders in the third row of seats
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
1 — USB Port
2 — Aux Jack
3 — Uconnect Theater USB Port
Center Console USB Charging Port
744 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge
battery operated USB devices when connected.
UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Your Uconnect Theater is designed to give your family
years of enjoyment.
There are multiple ways to interact with your Uconnect
Theater system.
•Play your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs
•Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port
•Listen to audio over the wireless headphones
•Plug and play a variety of devices into the Video USB
port
•Plug in standard headphones to listen to audio
Please review this Owner’s Manual to become familiar
with its features and operation.
Rear USB Charging Ports
10
MULTIMEDIA 745
Getting Started
There are three different ways to operate the features of
the Uconnect Theater:
•The Remote Control
•The Touchscreen Radio
•The Individual Video Screens
Uconnect Theater Screen
1 — Uconnect Theater Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Radio
3 — Uconnect Theater Media Hub
746 MULTIMEDIA
Accessing The System From The Uconnect Radio
You can access your Uconnect Theater system from the
radio touchscreen following the steps below:
1. Press the “Media” button.
2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button icon.
NOTE: The Uconnect Theater icon may be dragged and
dropped down to the personalized menu bar to create an
App/shortcut. Refer to “Personalized Menu Bar” in this
section for more information.
Uconnect Theater Button
10
MULTIMEDIA 747
Uconnect Theater Controls
Parents can control certain features of the system with the
“Uconnect Theater Controls” screens, right from the
Uconnect touchscreen radio. Options are:
•Change media sources
•Lock one or both screens
•Mute an individual screen or both screens
•Turn On/Off one or both screens
•Select APPS
•View media while gear selector is in Park
Uconnect Theater Controls Screen
1 — Power All
2 — Mute All
3 — Lock All
4 — Source Drop Down List
5—
Lock On/Off current screen
6 — Mute On/Off current
screen
7 — Power On/Off current
screen
748 MULTIMEDIA
Press this button and use the “Listen In” feature to listen
to audio through cabin speakers.
Accessing The System From The Uconnect
Theater Rear Screens
You can also access your Uconnect Theater system from
the rear screens from the steps below:
1. Lift screen upward, the system will automatically
power on.
NOTE: A message asking if you would like to pair a
remote will pop up if one has not already been paired to
the system.
2. If “YES” is selected to Pair a Remote, Pairing will
immediately start.
3. If “NO” is selected, the Uconnect Theater home screen
will pop up.
Listen In
10
MULTIMEDIA 749
NOTE:
•There will be a touchscreen notification message when
pairing is successful. Repeat the above steps to pair the
second remote.
•If remote is ever non-operational, try pairing remote.
When watching a video source, pushing “Settings”
icon on the touchscreen activates the Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the
video on the screen. The factory default settings are
already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need
to change these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, use one of the touchscreens. To
reset all values back to the original settings, select the
“Reset to Defaults” then select “YES.”
Pairing The Remote
If the remote needs to be paired to your Uconnect Theater
system, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the “Settings”
icon on the touchscreen.
Remote Pairing
750 MULTIMEDIA
2. Press the “Remote” button on the touchscreen in the
settings menu.
3. Select “Pair Remote” and follow the on screen instruc-
tions to complete the pairing process.
NOTE:
•There will be a touchscreen notification message when
pairing is successful/unsuccessful. Repeat the above
steps to pair the second remote.
•If remote is ever non-operational, try pairing remote.
•The system can accommodate up to 10 paired remote
controls.
Unpairing The Remote
In events such as updating the Uconnect Theater soft-
ware, or taking a remote to another vehicle, the remote
will need to be unpaired from your Uconnect Theater
system. To unpair the remote, follow the procedure
below:
1. Select “Manage Remote Controls” from the Remote
section of ⬙Settings and follow the on screen instruc-
tions to complete the unpairing process.
2. Push and hold the “Screen”, “Down Arrow”, and
“Play/Pause” buttons for 5 seconds, or until the
remote screen indicator light flashes.
3. Once complete, the remote will be ready to pair again.
NOTE: There will be a touchscreen notification message
when unpairing is successful. Repeat the above steps to
unpair a second remote.
10
MULTIMEDIA 751
Media Sources
Users can select content for each screen from the radio by
choosing desired content from drop down menu.
NOTE: Use the “View Screen” function to pull content
from one screen to the other in a single press of a button.
Doing this however will disable and gray out certain
player controls on the screen viewing the other screen’s
content.
Media Sources
1 – Available Sources Screen 1
2 – USB Source Playing Screen 2
752 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Theater Remote Control
1. Gesture Pad — Control mouse pointer position in this
area to move and select items on the touchscreen,
functions similar to a mouse.
2. Mute Button — Mutes headphone audio.
3. Home Button — Push to access “Sources”.
4. Arrow Buttons — Push the arrow
but-
tons to highlight an item or scroll through menus.
5. Fast Forward Button
— Push and hold to fast
forward through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to skip to the next track.
6. Play/Pause Button
㥋— Begin/resume or pause
disc play.
7. Fast Rewind Button
— Push and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous
track.
8. OK Button — Push to select the highlighted option in
a menu.
Remote Control
10
MULTIMEDIA 753
9. Screen Selector Button — Push the screen selector to
toggle between screen 1 (Driver Side), or screen 2
(Passenger Side).
10. Back Button — Push to exit out of menus or return to
previous screen.
11. Power Button — Turns the screen and wireless
headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or
off.
12. Screen Indicator — Indicates which screen (1 or 2) is
being controlled by the remote control when a button
is pushed.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
Each remote control requires two AAA batteries for
operation.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. Visit dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling
procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown inside the
battery compartment.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
754 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Theater Home Screen And Controls
You can choose sources such as HDMI, USB, Apps, or
Blu-ray. You may also view content of the opposite screen
in one step by choosing the “View Screen” source card.
Uconnect Theater Home Screen
1 — Search Button (Media
Search)
2 — Power Button
3 — Settings Button
4 — Toggle Button List and
Icon View
5 — Source Card Page Indica-
tor1or2
6 — Wired Headphone Volume
7 — Climate Control Button
8 — Home Button
9 — Source Cards
Source Card Selection
10
MULTIMEDIA 755
NOTE:
•Source card order can be changed by pressing the
Settings button on the touchscreen and scrolling down
to ⬙Source Card Order⬙.
•Use the “View Screen” function to pull content from
one screen to the other. Doing this however will
disable and gray out certain player controls.
General Settings
To change source card order, select “Source Card Reor-
der”, then press and hold source card on the touchscreen,
and drag and drop in desired order.
You can also adjust the following below and more.
•Brightness
•Media port lighting on and off
•Clock on and off
NOTE: System information can also be displayed under
General Settings.
Remote Settings
Under this setting, you can access the following:
•Manage Remotes
•Remote sensitivity (This adjusts the speed and sensi-
tivity of cursor on screen when using gesture pad)
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From
Uconnect Radio
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc or DVD disc into the disc player
with the label facing up. Or insert a USB drive into
rear Video USB port.
NOTE: The DVD/Blu-ray Disc player is located under
the radio controls in the instrument panel.
756 MULTIMEDIA
2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button on the touch-
screen. Refer to “Accessing The System From The
Uconnect Radio” in this section for further informa-
tion.
3. Select Disc or USB from the source controls on the
desired screen (1 or 2).
NOTE: To play a DVD/Blu-ray disc on both screens
simultaneously, select disc from both screen drop downs.
4. Press “Play” button on the touchscreen.
DVD Blu-ray Disc Player
1 — Disc Player (Rear)
2 — Rear Video USB Port
10
MULTIMEDIA 757
Using The Touchscreen Radio
NOTE: Control functions apply to individual screen
selected displayed on touchscreen.
Source Controls — Uconnect Radio
Media Control Screen
758 MULTIMEDIA
1. Power
Press to turn “selected Screen” On/Off.
2. Mute
Mute rear headphones for selected source for the current
ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear
headphones.
3. Lock
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions and
Touchscreen Controls for the selected source.
4. View
Select this button to full screen video if vehicle is not
moving. Button is disabled when not viewing a video
source or when the vehicle is in motion.
To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio select the “View”
button while in the selected screen controls, then select
the Disc source from drop down menu.
NOTE: Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle must be
stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
position for vehicles with automatic transmission.
Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions
The four colored buttons (red, green, blue, yellow) are
designed for use with certain Blu-ray disc movie titles to
access particular features or software on the disc. See the
documentation provided with your Blu-ray disc movie to
see if these buttons can be used.
10
MULTIMEDIA 759
Uconnect Theater Apps
Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions
1 — Red Button
2 — Green Button
3 — Blue Button
4 — Yellow Button Apps Home Screen
760 MULTIMEDIA
Select the Apps source card to play pre-loaded games.
Pressing the “Help” button teaches users how to play
each game. Pick from games:
•Back Seat Bingo
•Checkers
•Hanging Fruit
•License Plate Game
•Math Flash Cards
•Solitaire
•Sudoku
•Tic Tac Toe
NOTE: To exit a game, push “Exit Button” than “Back
Arrow,” or “Home Button” on the touchscreen.
Home Screen
10
MULTIMEDIA 761
Are We There Yet?
When a navigation route has been set from the Uconnect
radio the second row passengers can use “Are We There
Yet?” for an animated screen showing distance and time
remaining on navigation routes as well as the estimated
time of arrival with pop-up notifications. Notifications
and frequency can be set up for route information while
in other Uconnect Theater screens too.
NOTE: Route notifications will pop-up at the bottom of
the screen in the center.
Are We There Yet?
762 MULTIMEDIA
Using The Rear Video USB Port
Plug in a jump drive, iPhone, iPod or mass storage device
and play your favorite music or movies.
NOTE: To view USB media on the rear theater screens,
insert a USB jump drive into the port on the DVD/Blu-
ray disc player. The USB jump drive port is located under
the radio controls in the instrument panel.
Use the search feature to find your music faster.
Rear Video USB Port
Search Screen
10
MULTIMEDIA 763
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the HDMI 1 or 2
ports, located behind the first row seat.
AUX/HDMI/USB
1 — AUX Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
764 MULTIMEDIA
CAUTION!
Certain high-end video games will exceed the power
limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to “Power
Inverter” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in this
guide for further information.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screens.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not
muted and the headphone channel selector button is on
the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
two new AAA type batteries are installed in the head-
phones.
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
Uconnect Theater Headphones
1 — Power ON/OFF Button
2 — Volume Control Wheel
3 — Channel Selection Button 10
MULTIMEDIA 765
NOTE: Uconnect Theater must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the Uconnect Theater
system is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the remote control and the headphones are on
the same channel.
2. Push the Home button on the remote control.
3. When the Home menu appears on the touchscreen,
use the arrow buttons on the remote control to navi-
gate to the available modes and push the OK button to
select the new mode or use the Gesture Pad at the top
of the remote control.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. Visit dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Headphone Channel Selector Button
766 MULTIMEDIA
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling
procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown inside the
battery compartment.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Delphi Automotive Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover?
This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙or ⬙your⬙) of this
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless
headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Delphi Automotive. Foam earpieces, which will wear
over time through normal use, are specifically not cov-
ered (replacement foam is available for a nominal
charge). DELPHI AUTOMOTIVE IS NOT LIABLE FOR
ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROP-
ERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAIL-
URE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS DELPHI
AUTOMOTIVE LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPE-
CIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSE-
QUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER
10
MULTIMEDIA 767
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSO-
EVER. Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may
also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to
jurisdiction.
What Will Delphi Automotive Do? Delphi Automotive,
at its option, will repair or replace any defective Product.
Delphi Automotive reserves the right to replace any
discontinued Product with a comparable model. THIS
WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS
PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN
LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR MER-
CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Delphi Automotive wireless headphones, please phone
1-888-293-3332.
You may register your Delphi Automotive wireless head-
phones by phone at 1-888-293-3332.
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s arrow buttons will navigate the
cursor on the rear touchscreen for whichever touchscreen
is selected.
NOTE: Inserting a disc into the player will “auto play”
the disc if already in the ⬙Disc⬙source menu on the rear
screens.
768 MULTIMEDIA
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
•Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
•Close the video screen.
•When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
Rear Climate Controls
The rear climate controls can also be controlled using the
Uconnect Theater system. Refer to “Climate Controls” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Climate Controls 10
MULTIMEDIA 769
General Information
The operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit-
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
770 MULTIMEDIA
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE:
•This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-
ference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
•If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio techni-
cian for help.
10
MULTIMEDIA 771
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0, 8.4 or
8.4 NAV system.
Uconnect 5.0
772 MULTIMEDIA
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4 system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
10
MULTIMEDIA 773
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4 Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Func-
tions.
3 — Push To End Call
774 MULTIMEDIA
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
•Cancel to stop a current voice session
•Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
•Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 5.0
10
MULTIMEDIA 775
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
•Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
•Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4
776 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Uconnect 8.4 Radio
10
MULTIMEDIA 777
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
•Change source to Bluetooth
•Change source to AUX
•Change source to USB
•Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
778 MULTIMEDIA
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated for the Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4/8.4 NAV radios, your
system is ready. Visit UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
•Call John Smith
•Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
•Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
•Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect 8.4 Media
10
MULTIMEDIA 779
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phonebook
Uconnect 8.4 Phone
780 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have com-
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
and say . After the beep, say:
“Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me. I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
ber> minutes
late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
10
MULTIMEDIA 781
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
782 MULTIMEDIA
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
•Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
•Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 8.4 Climate
10
MULTIMEDIA 783
Navigation
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say:
•For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
•For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find ad-
dress 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 8.4 Navigation
784 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Access
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
WiFi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
10
MULTIMEDIA 785
Register
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Mobile App
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
Assist Button
786 MULTIMEDIA
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
NOTE:
•You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
•Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any-
where.
Mobile App
10
MULTIMEDIA 787
Voice Texting
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
sage to John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
process your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
788 MULTIMEDIA
TIP:
•Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
•Messages are limited to 140 characters.
•The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications” 10
MULTIMEDIA 789
Yelp
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you. Please refer to the procedure below to
launch a Yelp search:
1. Push the VR button
. After the beep, say: Launch
YELP.
2. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button
, then say: YELP
search.
3. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp
790 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Travel Link
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV
system. (Not available for 8.4 system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
•Show fuel prices
•Show 5 - day weather forecast
•Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-
mand.
SiriusXM Travel Link
10
MULTIMEDIA 791
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands
on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful
tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel.
After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play
podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages
and many other useful requests.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
Siri Eyes Free Available
792 MULTIMEDIA
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve-
nience there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
•“I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
•Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
ters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
•Reply with text message is not compatible with iP-
hones.
•Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
10
MULTIMEDIA 793
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
•The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
Additional Information
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
794 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect System Support:
•U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7
days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
•Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241 Please
have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
10
MULTIMEDIA 795
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................798
▫Prepare For The Appointment.............798
▫Prepare A List ........................798
▫Be Reasonable With Requests .............798
䡵IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............798
▫FCA US LLC Customer Center ............799
▫FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........799
▫In Mexico Contact .....................800
▫Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........800
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................800
▫Service Contract ......................800
䡵WARRANTY INFORMATION .............802
䡵MOPARPARTS ........................802
䡵REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............802
▫In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................802
▫In Canada...........................803
䡵PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............803
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
798 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
•If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•Owner’s name and address
•Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•Authorized dealer name
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 799
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
800 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 801
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
802 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 803
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
Call toll free at:
•1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
•1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•www.techauthority.com
804 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .409
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............632
Additives, Fuel ...........................678
Adjust
Forward ..............................85
Rearward ..............................85
AirBag................................322
Advance Front Air Bag ...................323
Air Bag Operation .......................324
Air Bag Warning Light ................325, 342
Driver Knee Air Bag .....................334
Enhanced Accident Response ............341, 608
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............345, 609
FrontAirBag ..........................325
If A Deployment Occurs ..................340
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................334
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............344
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ...........343
Side Air Bags ..........................335
Transporting Pets .......................373
Air Bag Light .....................231, 342, 375
Air Bag Maintenance.......................344
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .625
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................625
Air Conditioning..........................124
Air Conditioning Controls ...................124
Air Conditioning Filter .....................147
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............146
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone ..............130, 143
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............625, 626
Air Conditioning System .............124, 132, 625
Air Filter ...............................625
Air Pressure, Tires.........................650
Alarm
Arm The System ........................38
Disarm The System .......................39
Alarm (Security Alarm)..................240, 261
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............6
806 INDEX
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............631, 686
Disposal ..............................634
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................266
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................243
Ashtray ................................199
Assist, Hill Start ..........................275
Audio Systems (Radio) .....................694
Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................105
Automatic Headlights ......................111
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........132
Automatic Transaxle .......................394
Automatic Transmission .................396, 639
Adding Fluid .......................639, 689
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................639
Fluid Change ..........................639
Fluid Level Check ...................637, 638
Fluid Type .........................637, 689
Special Additives .......................638
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........194
Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................194
Axle Lubrication ..........................689
Battery .............................235, 620
Charging System Light ...................235
Jump Starting ..........................595
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........26
Remote Battery Replacement ................26
Saving Feature (Protection) ................116
Transmitter Battery Replacement .............26
Belts, Seat...............................375
Blind Spot Monitoring ......................278
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................627
B-Pillar Location ..........................644
Brake Assist System .......................268
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............268
Brake Fluid .............................689
Brake System ............................636
Fluid Check ........................636, 689
12
INDEX 807
Master Cylinder ........................636
Parking ..............................389
Warning Light .........................233
Brake/Transmission Interlock .................396
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................118
Bulb Replacement .........................543
Bulbs, Light.......................377, 537, 543
Camera, Rear .........................494, 497
Capacities, Fluid ..........................686
Caps, Filler
Fuel .............................502, 599
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................633
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............374, 681
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier ........................201
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ....................168
Car Washes .............................669
Cellular Phone ...........................770
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..............546
Certification Label.........................504
Chains, Tire .............................661
Changing A Flat Tire....................559, 639
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............373
Checks, Safety ...........................373
Child Restraint ...........................346
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..........................351
Center Seat LATCH ......................361
Child Restraints ........................346
Child Seat Installation .................365, 367
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......363
Infants And Child Restraints ...............349
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt .................................364
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ......354
Older Children And Child Restraints .........350
Seating Positions ........................353
808 INDEX
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ............369
Clean Air Gasoline ........................678
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................668
Climate Control ..........................124
Manual ..............................124
Coat Hook ..............................192
Cold Weather Operation ....................384
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............795
Compact Spare Tire........................659
Computer, Trip/Travel......................229
Connector
UCI.................................743
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........743
Contract, Service ..........................800
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........633
Cooling System...........................630
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............632
Coolant Capacity .......................686
Coolant Level ..........................634
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................634
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................631
Inspection .........................630, 634
Points To Remember .....................635
Pressure Cap ..........................633
Radiator Cap ..........................633
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......631, 686, 687
Corrosion Protection .......................667
Cruise Control (Speed Control)................409
Cruise Light ......................256, 259, 260
Customer Assistance .......................798
Customer Programmable Features .............697
Data Recorder, Event .......................345
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............120
Daytime Running Lights ....................113
Dealer Service............................621
Defroster, Windshield ...................129, 376
12
INDEX 809
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................121
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................261
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...........................619
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................605
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................634
Door Ajar ...........................241, 242
Door Ajar Light .......................241, 242
Door Locks
Key Fob Emergency Key ...................26
Door Opener, Garage.......................175
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .......................59
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ................................524
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) .......745
E-85 Fuel ...............................682
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ........194
Electric Parking Brake ......................389
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................106
Electronic Brake Control System ...............268
Anti-Lock Brake System ..................266
Traction Control System ...................268
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .....405, 409
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............271
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........238
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . .494, 497
Change Engine Oil ......................217
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .215
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup
Menu ................................215
EVIC Display ..........................215
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................529
Jacking ........................559, 562, 639
Jump Starting ..........................595
810 INDEX
Overheating ...........................600
Towing ..............................605
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................625
Block Heater ..........................386
Break-In Recommendations ................388
Checking Oil Level ......................619
Compartment ..........................618
Compartment Identification ................618
Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................687
Cooling ..............................630
Exhaust Gas Caution .................374, 681
Fails To Start ..........................385
Flooded, Starting .......................385
Fuel Requirements ......................677
Oil ...........................622, 686, 687
Oil Filter .............................624
Oil Selection .......................622, 686
Oil Synthetic ..........................624
Overheating ...........................600
Starting ..............................383
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................623
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................623
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ........341, 608
Ethanol .............................679, 682
Event Data Recorder .......................345
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................374, 681
Exhaust System .......................374, 628
Exterior Lighting..........................543
Exterior Lights .................110,377, 537, 543
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................625
Air Conditioning .......................147
Engine Oil .........................624, 687
Engine Oil Disposal .....................624
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................529
12
INDEX 811
Turn Signal .....................254, 377, 542
Flash-To-Pass ............................115
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range .........................684
Engine Oil ............................684
Fuel Requirements ...................682, 683
Maintenance ...........................685
Replacement Parts .......................685
Starting ..............................684
Flooded Engine Starting ....................385
Fluid, Brake .............................689
Fluid Capacities ..........................686
Fluid Leaks .............................378
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ................................636
Fog Lights ...........................113,544
Fog Light Service .........................544
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘N Go) Seating .............69
Forward Collision Warning ..................289
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................603
Front Position Light .......................543
Fuel...................................677
Additives .............................678
Clean Air .............................678
Ethanol ...........................679, 682
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................502
Gasoline ..............................677
Light ................................247
Materials Added ........................678
Methanol .............................679
Octane Rating ......................677, 687
Requirements ..........................677
Specifications ..........................687
Tank Capacity ..........................686
Fuel, Flexible ............................682
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..........175, 182
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................502
812 INDEX
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................678
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................678
Gear Ranges .............................398
Glass Cleaning ...........................672
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...................507
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................507
GVWR .................................504
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................524
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................529
Headlights
Bulb Replacement .......................540
Cleaning .............................668
Lights On Reminder .....................112
Passing ..............................115
Replacing .............................540
Time Delay ............................112
Washers ..............................112
Head Restraints ...........................98
Heated Mirrors ...........................107
Heater .................................124
Heater, Engine Block .......................386
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ....115
Hill Start Assist...........................275
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................510
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)..............175
Hood Prop ..............................158
Hood Release ............................158
Hook, Coat..............................192
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................104, 529
Instrument Cluster ..............214, 239, 246, 254
Instrument Cluster ......................217
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............671
Interior And Instrument Lights................117
12
INDEX 813
Interior Appearance Care....................670
Interior Fuses ............................558
Interior Lights............................117
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............121
Introduction ..............................4
Inverter, Power ...........................197
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ....................743
Jack Location ............................560
Jack Operation ........................559, 639
Jump Starting ............................595
KeyFob.................................19
Arm The Alarm .........................38
Disarm The Alarm .......................39
Remote Battery Replacement ................26
Keyless Enter-N-Go
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ..................734
Passive Entry Programming ................734
Keys ...................................19
Lane Change Assist ........................115
LaneSense ..............................487
Lap/Shoulder Belts ........................306
Latches ................................378
Lead Free Gasoline ........................677
Leaks, Fluid .............................378
Life Of Tires .............................655
Liftgate ................................160
Light Bulbs ..........................377, 543
Light Replacement ........................543
Lights .................................377
AirBag........................231, 342, 375
Automatic Headlights ....................111
Battery Saver ..........................116
Brake Assist Warning ....................274
Brake Warning .........................233
Bulb Replacement ....................537, 543
814 INDEX
Center Mounted Stop ....................546
Cruise ........................256, 259, 260
Daytime Running .......................113
Exterior ...........................377, 543
Fog..............................113,544
Front Replacement ......................543
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................529
Headlights ............................540
Headlights On Reminder ..................112
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............115
Intensity Control ........................118
Interior ..............................117
Lights On Reminder .....................112
Low Fuel .............................247
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........250
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........120
Park ................................257
Passing ..............................115
Reading ..............................117
Seat Belt Reminder ......................232
Security Alarm .........................240
Service ...............................537
Side Marker ........................542, 543
SmartBeams ...........................115
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .........251, 293
Traction Control ........................274
Turn Signal .....................254, 377, 542
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......254
Loading Vehicle .......................168, 504
Tires ................................644
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode ......................226
Battery Saver On .......................226
Electrical Load Reduction .................226
Intelligent Battery Sensor ..................226
Low Tire Pressure System ...................293
Lubrication, Body .........................627
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) ...................201
12
INDEX 815
Lug Nuts ...............................676
Maintenance Free Battery....................620
Maintenance Schedule ......................613
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......250
Manual, Service ..........................803
Map/Reading Lights .......................117
Marker Lights, Side........................542
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................636
Memory Feature (Memory Seat)................90
Memory Seat ..........................90, 107
Methanol ...............................679
Mini-Trip Computer .......................229
Mirrors ................................104
Automatic Dimming .....................105
Electric Remote .........................106
Exterior Folding ........................106
Heated ...............................107
Memory ..............................90
Outside ..............................106
Rearview ..........................104, 529
Vanity ............................109, 192
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................293
MOPAR Parts ............................802
MTBE/ETBE ............................679
Multi-Function Control Lever .................113
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................388
Occupant Restraints .......................302
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).............677, 687
Oil, Engine ..........................622, 687
Capacity .............................686
Change Interval ........................622
Checking .............................619
Disposal ..............................624
Filter .............................624, 687
816 INDEX
Filter Disposal .........................624
Identification Logo ......................623
Materials Added To ......................624
Pressure Warning Light ...................239
Recommendation ....................622, 686
Synthetic .............................624
Viscosity ..........................623, 686
Oil Filter, Change .........................624
Oil Filter, Selection ........................624
Oil Pressure Light .........................239
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................261
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) .............175
Operating Precautions ......................261
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................104, 106
Overheating, Engine .......................600
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,803
Paint Care ..............................667
Parking Brake............................389
ParkSense System, Rear..................436, 447
Personalized Menu Bar .....................694
Pets ...................................373
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........644
Power
Inverter ..............................197
Mirrors ..............................106
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........194
Seats ..............................84, 87
Power Seats
Forward ..............................85
Rearward ..............................85
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...............317
Preparation For Jacking .....................562
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................318
Radial Ply Tires ..........................652
12
INDEX 817
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........633
Radio Frequency
General Information ...................22, 36
Radio Operation ..........................770
Radio Remote Controls .....................742
Rear Air Conditioning...................130, 143
Rear Camera .........................494, 497
Rear Cross Path ..........................285
Rear ParkSense System ..................436, 447
Rearview Mirrors .........................104
Reclining Front Seats .......................60
Recorder, Event Data .......................345
Recreational Towing .......................521
Reformulated Gasoline .....................678
Refrigerant ..............................626
Reminder, Seat Belt ........................304
Remote Control
Starting System .........................33
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Arm The Alarm .........................38
Disarm The Alarm .......................39
Remote Battery Replacement ................26
Transmitter Battery Replacement .............26
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........742
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ...................35
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features ........................36, 712, 737
Uconnect Settings .................36, 712, 737
Remote Starting System......................33
Replacement Bulbs ........................537
Replacement Tires .........................655
Reporting Safety Defects ....................802
Restraint, Head ...........................98
Restraints, Child ..........................346
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) ...................201
818 INDEX
Rotation, Tires ...........................663
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................375
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................377
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................802
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................374
Safety Information, Tire .....................639
Safety Tips ..............................373
Schedule, Maintenance .....................613
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .....311
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ..........318
Energy Management Feature ...............318
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ...............309
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................306
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ..............311
Pregnant Women .......................317
Seat Belt Extender .......................316
Seat Belt Pretensioner ....................318
Seat Belt Reminder ......................304
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................670
Seat Belt Reminder ........................304
Seat Belts............................304, 375
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ..................311
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........311
Child Restraint .........................346
Extender .............................316
Front Seat ......................304, 306, 309
Inspection ............................375
Operating Instructions ....................309
Pregnant Women .......................317
Pretensioners ..........................318
Rear Seat .............................306
Reminder .............................232
Untwisting Procedure ....................311
Seats ..............................58, 85, 94
Adjustment .....................58, 59, 63, 85
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘nG
o) .................69
12
INDEX 819
Heated ...............................94
Memory ..............................90
Power .............................84, 87
Reclining ..............................60
Seatback Release ......................59, 63
Stow ⬘N Go (Fold in Floor) .................69
Tilting .............................59, 63
Security Alarm ...........................240
Arm The System ........................38
Disarm The System .......................39
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............687
Service Assistance .........................798
Service Contract ..........................800
Service Manuals ..........................803
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ..................396
Shoulder Belts ...........................306
Signals, Turn...................113,254, 377, 542
SmartBeams .............................115
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................661
Snow Tires ..............................658
Spare Tire.....................560, 659, 660, 661
Spark Plugs .............................687
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) .........................687
Oil..................................687
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ...........................409
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ..................416
Cancel ...............................409
Resume ..............................409
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............405, 409
Starting..............................33, 383
Cold Weather ..........................384
Engine Fails To Start .....................385
Remote ...............................33
Starting And Operating .....................383
Starting Procedures ........................383
820 INDEX
Steering
Tilt Column ...........................101
Wheel, Heated .........................102
Wheel, Tilt ............................101
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............742
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .742
Storage, Vehicle...........................147
Stow ⬘N Go (Fold in Floor) Seats ...............69
StownVAC.............................169
Stuck, Freeing............................603
Sunglasses Storage ........................200
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag.........322
Sway Control, Trailer.......................278
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................624
System, Remote Starting .....................33
Telescoping Steering Column .................101
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........132
Tilt Steering Column .......................101
Tire And Loading Information Placard ..........644
Tire Markings ............................640
Tires ........................377, 649, 659, 664
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................655
Air Pressure ...........................649
Chains ...............................661
Changing .........................559, 639
Compact Spare .........................659
General Information ..................649, 659
High Speed ...........................652
Inflation Pressures .......................650
Jacking ........................559, 562, 639
Life Of Tires ...........................655
Load Capacity ......................644, 645
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .........220, 293
Pressure Warning Light ...................251
Quality Grading ........................664
Radial ...............................652
Replacement ...........................655
12
INDEX 821
Rotation ..............................663
Safety ............................639, 649
Snow Tires ............................658
Spare Tire ...................560, 659, 660, 661
Spinning .............................654
Trailer Towing .........................516
Tread Wear Indicators ....................654
Tire Safety Information .....................639
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................514
Towing ................................506
Disabled Vehicle ........................605
Guide ...............................511
Recreational ...........................521
Weight ...............................511
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........521
Traction ................................523
Traction Control ..........................268
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..................278
Trailer Towing ...........................506
Cooling System Tips .....................520
Hitches ..............................510
Minimum Requirements ..................515
Tips.................................520
Trailer And Tongue Weight ................514
Wiring ...............................518
Trailer Towing Guide.......................511
Trailer Weight ............................511
Transaxle ...............................394
Automatic ............................394
Operation .............................394
Transmission ............................396
Automatic .........................396, 637
Maintenance ...........................637
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....175
Transporting Pets .........................373
Tread Wear Indicators ......................654
822 INDEX
Turn Signals..........................254, 542
UCI Connector ...........................743
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features ......36, 712, 737
Uconnect Settings .................36, 712, 737
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert .....................786
Yelp.................................790
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ...........734
Passive Entry Programming ................734
Uconnect Settings .......................734
Uconnect Voice Command ...................772
Umbrella Holder..........................187
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................664
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .743
Universal Transmitter ......................175
Unleaded Gasoline ........................677
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...............311
Vacuum ................................169
StownVAC...........................169
Vanity Mirrors ........................109, 192
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............675
Vehicle Loading .......................504, 645
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............6
Vehicle Storage ...........................147
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................623
Voice Recognition System (VR)................772
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................529
Warnings And Cautions ......................6
Warranty Information ......................802
Washers, Windshield .......................619
Washing Vehicle ..........................669
Water
Driving Through ........................524
12
INDEX 823
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................668
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................668
Wind Buffeting ...........................155
Window Fogging .........................147
Windshield Defroster ...................129, 376
Windshield Washers ....................120, 619
Fluid ................................619
Windshield Wiper Blades....................627
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................627
Wipers, Intermittent ....................120, 121
Wrecker Towing ..........................605
824 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
17RU-126-AA
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

Navigation menu